Instrukcja obsługi Nissan Murano (2010)

Nissan Automatyczny Murano (2010)

Przeczytaj poniżej 📖 instrukcję obsługi w języku polskim dla Nissan Murano (2010) (425 stron) w kategorii Automatyczny. Ta instrukcja była pomocna dla 4 osób i została oceniona przez 2 użytkowników na średnio 4.5 gwiazdek

Pobierz PDF

Strona 1/425

Black plate (2,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 7/ 31

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of

driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any

questions, we will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with

controls and maintenance requirements, assist-

ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-

TION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

.NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

.ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-

its and never drive too fast for

conditions.

.ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle

features or taking other actions that

could distract you.

.ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint systems.

Pre-teen children should be seated

in the rear seat.

.ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety

features to all occupants of the

vehicle.

.ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-

ual for important safety information.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, failure

to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-

road driving precautions”, “Avoiding colli-

sion and rollover” and “Driving safety

precautions” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems result-

ing from modification may not be covered

under NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

options available on this model. Therefore,

you may find some information that does

not apply to your vehicle.

Foreword

Black plate (3,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design at any time without

notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or

serious personal injury. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed care-

fully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not

do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the front

of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer and birth defects

or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material - special handling may

apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Black plate (4,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

BLUETOOTH®is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A.

Gracenote®is a registered tra-

demark of Gracenote, Inc. The

Gracenote logo and logo type,

and the “Powered by Gracenote”

logo are trademarks of Grace-

note.

XM Radio®requires a subscrip-

tion, sold separately after the first

90 days. It is not available in

Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For

more information, visit

www.xmradio.com.

C2009 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or

by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-

copying, recording or otherwise, without the

prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,

Ltd.

Black plate (5,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, please contact the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

— Your name, address, and telephone number

— Vehicle identification number (attached to

the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

— Date of purchase

— Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer’s name

— Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM

Black plate (1,1)

Table of

Contents

Model "Z51-D" Edited: 2009/ 8/ 3

Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

Black plate (1,1)

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ................................................... 0-2

Exterior front ..................................................... 0-3

Exterior rear ...................................................... 0-5

Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-6

Instrument panel ................................................ 0-7

Meters and gauges............................................. 0-9

Engine compartment ......................................... 0-10

VQ35DE engine .......................................... 0-10

Warning and indicator lights ............................... 0-11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Black plate (4,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0372B

1. Rear center seat belt (Page 1-22)

2. Adjustable headrest (P.1-12)

3. Seat belts (P.1-15)

4. Armrest (P.1-14)

5. Head restraints (P.1-9)

— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-11)

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags (P.1-45)

7. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-45)

8. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap

child restraint) (P.1-29)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system (P.1-28)

10. Rear seats (P.1-6)

— Child restraints (P.1-26)

11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bags (P.1-45)

12. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-57)

13. Front seats (P.1-3)

14. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)

— Advanced Air Bag System (P.1-51)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Black plate (5,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0373

1. Hood (P.3-18)

2. Headlight and turn signal lights

— Switch operation (P.2-32)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)

3. Windshield wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-28)

— Rain-sensing auto wiper system*

(P.2-29)

— Blade replacement (P.8-17)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)

4. Roof rack (rail)* (P.2-47)

5. Moonroof* (P.2-51)

6. Power windows (P.2-48)

7. Recovery hook (P.6-15)

8. License plate installation (P.9-11)

9. Fog lights*

— Switch operation (P.2-35)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)

10. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P.8-30, P.9-7)

— Flat tire (6-2)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(P.2-12, P.5-3)

11. Outside mirrors (P.3-29)

12. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)

— Security system (P.2-25)

13. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-7)

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Black plate (6,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

14. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P.3-23)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

*: if so equipped

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Black plate (7,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0374

1. Lift gate (P.3-19)

— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-15)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)

2. Rear window wiper and washer

— Switch operation (P.2-30)

— Window washer fluid (P.8-12)

3. Rear window defroster (P.2-31)

4. High-mounted stop light

— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)

5. Antenna (P.4-62)

— Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-32)

6. Back-up light

— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)

7. Rear combination light

— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)

*: if so equipped

EXTERIOR REAR

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Black plate (8,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0636

1. Cargo cover* (P.2-45)

2. Rear personal light (P.2-53)

3. Coat hooks (P.2-48)

4. Mobile Entertainment System (MES)*

— Flip-down screen (P.4-64)

— Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player (P.4-63)

— DVD remote controller (P.4-67)

— Headphones (P.4-66)

5. Door armrest

— Power window switch (P.2-48)

— Power door lock switch (P.3-6)

— Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-29)

6. Sun visors (P.3-26)

7. Moonroof* (P.2-51)

8. Front map lights (P.2-53)

9. Mood light (P.2-54)

10. Sunglasses holder (P.2-42)

11. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-27)

— Anti-glare adjustment* (P.3-28)

— HomeLink®universal transceiver* (P.2-55)

— Compass* (P.2-7)

12. Cargo area

— Storages (P.2-45)

— Luggage hooks (P.2-46)

— Cargo light (P.2-55)

— Spare tire (P.6-3)

13. Rear cup holders (P.2-41)

14. Heated seat switch (rear)* (P.2-37)

15. Console box - rear (P.2-43)

16. Auxiliary input jack* (P.4-48)

17. Console box (P.2-43)

— Power outlet* (P.2-39)

18. Front cup holders (P.2-41)

19. Storage box (P.2-44) or Cigarette lighter/Ashtray

(P.2-40)

*: if so equipped

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Black plate (9,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0627

1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)

2. Power lift gate switch* (P.3-19)

3. Headlight, fog light* and turn signal switch

(P.2-32)

4. Fuel-filler door opener switch (P.3-23)

5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*

— Audio control* (P.4-61)

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System control*

(P.4-75)

6. Meters and gauges (P.2-4)

7. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-36)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-45)

— Power steering system (P.5-25)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches (P.5-18)

9. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-28)

10. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9)

11. Center ventilator (P.4-25)

12. Center display (P.4-2)/Center color display*

(P.4-2)/Navigation system**

13. Heater/air conditioner or

Center multi-function control panel*

— Navigation system**

— Vehicle information and setting buttons (P.4-8)

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System (P.4-75)

— Audio system (P.4-31)

14. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-36)

15. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-45)

16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P.2-39, 5-27)

17. Hood release handle (P.3-18)

18. Power lift gate main switch (P.3-19)

19. Power seatback switch* (P.1-6)

20. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)

21. Parking brake (P.5-17)

22. Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch

(P.3-25)

23. Intelligent Key port (P.5-11)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Black plate (10,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

24. Audio system (P.4-31)

— Clock (P.2-38)

25. Heated seat switch* (P.2-37)

26. Selector lever (P.5-13)

27. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-52)

28. Power outlet (P.2-39)

29. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch* (P.5-21)

30. Rear window and outside mirror* defroster switch

(P.2-31)

31. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-26) or Audio

system (P.4-31)

32. Glove box (P.2-43)

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped).

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Black plate (11,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0377

1. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-35)

2. Tachometer (P.2-6)

3. Speedometer (P.2-5)

4. Fuel gauge (P.2-7)

5. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-10)

6. Trip computer switch (P.2-21)

7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display (P.2-17)

8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)

9. Vehicle information display

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-5)

— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator (P.2-15)

10. RESET switch for trip odometer (P.2-5)

METERS AND GAUGES

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Black plate (12,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SDI2172

VQ35DE ENGINE

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-11)

2. Drive belt location (P.8-15)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-8)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

5. Air cleaner (P.8-16)

6. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-20)

7. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

8. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-7)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-7)

10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-8)

11. Battery (P.8-13)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Black plate (13,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Warning

light Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (AWD models)* 2-10

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light 2-11

Brake warning light 2-11

Charge warning light 2-12

Engine oil pressure warning

light 2-12

Intelligent Key warning light 2-12

Low tire pressure warning light 2-12

Master warning light 2-14

Seat belt warning light 2-14

Supplemental air bag warning

light 2-14

Indicator

light Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK

indicator light (AWD models)* 2-14

Continuously Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) position indicator

light

2-15

Cruise indicator light 2-15

Front passenger air bag status

light 2-15

High beam indicator light 2-15

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) 2-15

Overdrive off indicator light 2-16

Slip indicator light 2-16

Small light indicator lights 2-16

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights 2-16

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light 2-16

*: if so equipped

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Black plate (14,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Black plate (4,1)

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Seats .............................................................. 1-2

Front seats ................................................... 1-3

Rear seats.................................................... 1-6

Head restraints .............................................. 1-9

Adjustable headrest ...................................... 1-12

Armrest...................................................... 1-14

Seat belts ...................................................... 1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage ....................... 1-15

Child safety ................................................ 1-17

Pregnant women.......................................... 1-18

Injured persons............................................ 1-18

Three-point type seat belt .............................. 1-18

Seat belt extenders....................................... 1-25

Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-25

Child restraints ................................................ 1-26

Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-26

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System

(LATCH) .................................................... 1-28

Top tether strap child restraint......................... 1-29

Child restraint installation using LATCH ............. 1-31

Child restraint installation using the seat belts..... 1-35

Booster seats.................................................. 1-41

Precautions on booster seats.......................... 1-41

Booster seat installation................................. 1-43

Supplemental restraint system............................. 1-45

Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-45

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats) ................................................ 1-51

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag systems ......... 1-55

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ......... 1-57

Supplemental air bag warning labels................. 1-58

Supplemental air bag warning light................... 1-58

Repair and replacement procedure................... 1-59

Black plate (16,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0133

WARNING

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON

SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this

section.

.After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely

locked.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when

the passenger sits well back and

straight up in the seat. If the seat-

back is reclined, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and being injured

is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or da-

mages.

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (17,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0792

FRONT SEATS

Front manual seat adjustment

Forward and backward:

Pull the lever *

1up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position. Release the lever to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining:

To recline the seatback, pull the lever *

2up and

lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull

the lever up and lean your body forward. Release

the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback

can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission in

the P (Park) position.

SSS0793

Seat lifter (if so equipped):

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired position

is achieved.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Black plate (18,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0684

Lumbar support (if so equipped):

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver.

Move the lever *

1up or down to adjust the

seatback lumbar area.

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

.The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

.Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

See “AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER” in the

“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section

for the seat position memory function.

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (19,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS1026

Forward and backward:

Moving the switch *

1forward or backward will

slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

Reclining:

Move the recline switch *

2backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch *

2forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.) Also, the seatback

can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in

the P (Park) position.

SSS1027

Seat lifter (if so equipped):

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle of the front portion or

height of the seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Black plate (20,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS1028

Lumbar support (if so equipped):

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver.

Push the front *

1or back *

2end of the switch

to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

SSS0569

REAR SEATS

Folding

Before folding the rear seats:

.Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks

on the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks” later

in this section.)

.Disconnect and stow the center seat belt

and tongue into the retractor base. (See

“Rear center seat belt” later in this section.)

.Always reconnect the center seat belt when

the seat is returned to the upright position.

.Remove drink containers from the rear cup

holder.

To fold down the seatbacks:

Pull the strap on the rear seat *

A. Pull the lever

Bbeside the cargo area and fold the seat-

back.

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (21,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0821

To return the seatbacks:

Manual operation:

Lift up each seatback and push it to the upright

position until it is latched.

Power operation (if so equipped):

Push and hold the corresponding switch located

on the lower side of the instrument panel *

Bor

the right or left side in the cargo area *

A beep sounds once and the seatback will be

returned automatically.

A beep sounds twice when the seatback is fully

returned to the seating position.

If the control unit detects any obstacle or

malfunctions while in the power operation, a

beep sounds for 4 seconds and the seatback

will return to the folded position automatically.

Check if there are any obstacles caught that

prevent seats from returning to the folded

position. See a NISSAN dealer if the beep still

sounds.

CAUTION

When operating the rear power seat-

back return, make sure that the vehicle

is stopped and the transmission is in

the P (Park) position.

WARNING

.Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats

when they are in the fold-down

position. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

.Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is

in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

.Do not fold down the rear seats

when occupants are in the rear seat

area or any luggage is on the rear

seats.

.When folding or returning the seat-

backs to the upright position, to

avoid injury to yourself and others:

— Make sure that the seat path is

clear before moving the seat.

— Be careful not to allow hands or

feet to get caught or pinched in

the seat.

.Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

.When returning the seatbacks, be

sure to attach the rear center seat

belt connector.

.Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

.When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the

seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position and the rear

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Black plate (22,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

center seat belt connector is com-

pletely secured.

.If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured

in the correct position, serious per-

sonal injury may result in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

SSS0227A

Reclining

Pull the reclining strap *

Aand position the

seatback at the desired angle. Release the

reclining strap after positioning the seat at the

desired angle.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes to help

obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “PRECAU-

TIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this

section.) The seatback may also be reclined to

allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is

parked.

WARNING

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON

SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this

section.

.After adjustment, check to be sure

the seat is securely locked.

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (23,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other

vehicle safety systems. They may pro-

vide additional protection against injury

in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the

head restraints properly, as specified in

this section. Check the adjustment after

someone else uses the seat. Do not

attach anything to the head restraint

stalks or remove the head restraint. Do

not use the seat if the head restraint

has been removed. If the head restraint

was removed, reinstall and properly

adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions

can reduce the effectiveness of the

head restraints. This may increase the

risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

SSS1013

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints. The head re-

straints are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a head restraint.

SSS0992

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Black plate (24,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0997

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

SSS0993

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

SSS0994

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint down.

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (25,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0995

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest

position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure

place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

SSS0996

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint

is facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notches *

1must be in-

stalled in the hole with the lock knob *

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

SSS0508

Front-seat Active Head Restraint

The Active Head Restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback receives

from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The

movement of the head restraint helps support

the occupant’s head by reducing its backward

movement and helping absorb some of the

forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-

sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said

that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Black plate (26,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as

described earlier in this section.

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjust the headrests properly, as

specifiedinthissection.Checkthe

adjustment after someone else uses

the seat. Do not attach anything to the

adjustable headrest stalks or remove

the adjustable headrests. Do not use

the seat if the adjustable headrests

have been removed. If the headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly

adjust the headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position. Failure to

follow these instructions can reduce the

effectiveness of the adjustable head-

rests. This may increase the risk of

serious injury or death in a collision.

SSS1014

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with adjustable headrests. The head-

rests are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with an adjustable headrest.

SSS0992

Components

1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (27,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0997

Adjustment

Adjust the headrest so the center is level with

the center of your ears.

SSS0993

To raise the headrest, pull it up.

SSS0994

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the headrest down.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Black plate (28,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0995

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly in a secure

place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

SSS0996

Install

1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure that the headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notches *

1must be in-

stalled in the hole with the lock knob *

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an

occupant uses the seating position.

SSS0229A

ARMREST

Rear armrest

Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (29,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your

chances of being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be greatly

reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and

all of your passengers to buckle up every time

you drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SSS0134

SEAT BELTS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Black plate (30,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0016

SSS0014

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat and,

if appropriate, in a child restraint.

.The seat belt should be properly

adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do

so may reduce the effectiveness of

the entire restraint system and in-

crease the chance or severity of

injury in an accident. Serious injury

or death can occur if the seat belt is

not worn properly.

.Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your

chest. Never put the belt behind

your back, under your arm or across

your neck. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder.

.Position the lap belt as low and

snug as possible AROUND THE

HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt

worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an acci-

dent.

.Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper

buckle.

.Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

.Do not allow more than one person

to use the same seat belt.

.Never carry more people in the

vehicle than there are seat belts.

.If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may in-

dicate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

.No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do

not modify the seat belt, add mate-

rial, or install devices that may

change the seat belt routing or

tension. Doing so may affect the

operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the

seat belt system may result in

serious personal injury.

.Once a seat belt pretensioner has

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (31,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.

.Removal and installation of the

pretensioner system components

should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

.All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN

recommends that all seat belt as-

semblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was

minor and the belts show no da-

mage and continue to operate prop-

erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use

during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is

noted.

.All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the

restraint manufacturer’s inspection

instructions and replacement re-

commendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

.Rear-facing child restraint

.Front-facing child restraint

.Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear-

facing child restraints. Front-facing child re-

straints are available for children who outgrow

rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1

year old. Booster seats are used to help position

a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a front-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate

child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. (See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional pro-

tection.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. (See “SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM” later in this section.)

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Black plate (32,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

Small children

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placed in a front-facing

child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions for minimum and maximum weight

and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-

mends that small children be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat

belts which are provided. The seat belt may not

fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5

cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and

80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to

obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially availableboosterseatifthe

shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits

close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of

the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The

booster seat should raise the child so that the

shoulder belt is properly positioned across the

top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap

belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only

be used in seating positions that have a three-

point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it

complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. Once the child has grown so the

shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face

and neck, use the shoulder belt without the

booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

possible around the hips, not the waist. Place

the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over

your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (33,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

properly.

SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this

section.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

.The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

belt to move and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

.If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Black plate (34,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

.Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

.Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to

allow the driver and passengers some freedom

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat

belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for

child restraint installation.

When ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, see “CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in

this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is

activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be

certain that seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the

buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat

belt movement by two separate methods:

.When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

.When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

.Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (35,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any question about seat belt

operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

SSS0351A

Shoulder belt height adjustment

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. (See

“PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE”

earlier in this section.)

To adjust, pull the adjustment button *

1, and

then move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position *

2, so that the belt passes

over the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not falling

off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment

button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into

position.

WARNING

.After adjustment, release the ad-

justment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down

to make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

.The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Black plate (36,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0845

Seat belt hooks

When the rear seat belts are not in use and

when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear

outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SSS0846

Rear center seat belt

The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue

1and a seat belt tongue *

2. Both the

connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must

be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-

tion.

SSS0241

WARNING

.Always fasten the connector tongue

and the seat belt in the order shown.

.Always make sure both the connec-

tor tongue and the seat belt tongue

are secured when using the seat

belt or installing a child restraint. Do

notusetheseatbeltorchild

restraint with only the seat belt

tongue attached. This could result

in serious personal injury in case of

an accident or a sudden stop.

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (37,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0703

The center seat belt buckle and the tongue are

identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat

belt tongue can be fastened only into the center

seat belt buckle.

SSS0225

Stowing rear center seat belt:

When folding down the rear seat, the rear center

seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position

as follows:

1. Hold the connector tongue *

1so that the

seat belt does not retract suddenly when the

tongue is released from the connector

buckle. Release the connector tongue by

inserting a suitable tool such as key *

Ainto

the connector buckle.

2. Insert the seat belt tongue into the retractor

base first *

3. Then secure the connector tongue into the

retractor base *

WARNING

.Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

.When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the

seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position and the rear

center seat belt connector is com-

pletely secured.

.If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Black plate (38,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

in the correct position, serious per-

sonal injury may result in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

SSS0232

Attaching rear center seat belt:

Always be sure the rear center seat belt

connector tongue and connector buckle are

attached. Disconnect only when folding down

the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

1. Pull out the connector tongue from the

retractor base *

2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the

retractor base *

3. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector

buckle until it clicks *

The center seat belt connector tongue and

buckle are indicated by the !and ~mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue can be

attached only into the rear center seat belt

connector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat

belts” earlier in this section.

WARNING

.Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

.When attaching the rear center seat

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (39,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

belt connector, be certain that the

seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position and the rear

center seat belt connector is com-

pletely secured.

.If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured

in the correct position, serious per-

sonal injury may result in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

SSS0235

Storing rear seat belt buckles

Before folding down the seat, put the buckles in

the storage of the seat cushion to avoid

dropping it under the seat cushion.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available that is

compatible with the installed seat belts. The

extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN

dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

.Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

.Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal

injury in the event of an accident.

.Never use seat belt extenders to

install child restraints. If the child

restraint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured in a

collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

.To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

.If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Black plate (40,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

.Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt

assembly should be replaced.

SSS0099

SSS0100

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

.Infants and small children should

always be placed in an appropriate

child restraint while riding in the

vehicle. Failure to use a child re-

straint can result in serious injury or

death.

.Infants and small children should

never be carried on your lap. It is not

possible for even the strongest

adult to resist the forces of a severe

accident. The child could be crushed

between the adult and parts of the

vehicle. Also, do not put the same

seat belt around both your child and

yourself.

.Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child. A

rear-facing child restraint must only

be used in the rear seat.

.NISSAN recommends that the child

restraint be installed in the rear

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (41,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

seat. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat. If you must install a

front-facing child restraint in the

front seat, see “CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS” later in this section.

.Improper use or improper installa-

tion of a child restraint can increase

the risk or severity of injury for both

the child and other occupants of the

vehicle and can lead to serious

injury or death in an accident.

.Follow all of the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for in-

stallation and use. When purchasing

a child restraint, be sure to select

one which will fit your child and

vehicle. It may not be possible to

properly install some types of child

restraints in your vehicle.

.If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision or a sudden

stop greatly increases.

.Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

.Adjustable seatbacks should be

positioned to fit the child restraint,

but as upright as possible.

.After attaching the child restraint,

test it before you place the child in

it. Push it from side to side while

holding the seat near the LATCH

attachment or by the seat belt path.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side

to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the belt holds the

restraint in place. If the restraint is

not secure, tighten the belt as

necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You

may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

.When your child restraint is not in

use, keep it secured with the LATCH

System or a seat belt to prevent it

from being thrown around in case of

a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the child

restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System

or LATCH. Some child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to these lower anchors. For

details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren System (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

(See “CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS” later in this section.)

In general, child restraints are also designed to

be installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder

seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and small children of various sizes. When

selecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

.Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Black plate (42,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

.If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on front-facing child

restraints to be secured to the designated

anchor point on the vehicle.

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compa-

tible child restraints. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install

child restraints in the rear outboard seating

positions only. Do not attempt to install a child

restraint in the center position using the LATCH

anchors.

SSS0419B

LATCH system anchor location

SSS0637

LATCH system lower anchor

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (43,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of

the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH anchors.

WARNING

.Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration. If a child

restraint is not secured properly,

your child could be seriously injured

or killed in an accident.

.Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using

the LATCH anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

.Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH anchor

attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this

system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint. Check your

child restraint for a label stating that it is

compatible with LATCH system. This information

may also be in the instructions provided by the

child restraint manufacturer.

SSS0644

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LATCH child restraints generally require the use

of a top tether strap. (See “TOP TETHER

STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” later in this section

for installation instructions.)

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint. (See

“CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH” later in this section.)

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-

STRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraint

requires the use of a top tether strap, it must

be secured to an anchor point.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Black plate (44,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

.Your child could be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint top tether strap is da-

maged.

— If the cargo cover contacts the

top tether strap when it is at-

tached to the top tether anchor,

remove the cargo cover from the

vehicle or secure it on the cargo

floor below its attachment loca-

tion. If the cargo cover is not

removed, it may damage the top

tether strap during a collision.

— Do not allow cargo to contact

the top tether strap when it is

attached to the top tether an-

chor. Properly secure the cargo

so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not

properly secured or that con-

tacts the top tether strap may

damage the top tether strap

during a collision.

SSS0822

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the seatbacks.

Installing top tether strap

First secure the child restraint with the LATCH

system (rear outboard seating positions only) or

the seat belt as applicable.

1. Remove the headrest from the seatback.

Store it in a secure place.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

bracket that provides the straightest instal-

lation.

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (45,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint on the rear

seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-

tails.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING LATCH

WARNING

.Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown. For the LATCH lower anchor

locations, see “Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren System

(LATCH)” earlier in this section. If a

child restraint is not secured prop-

erly, your child could be seriously

injured or killed in an accident.

.The LATCH anchors are designed to

withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly fitted child restraints.

Under no circumstance are they to

be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

.Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower

anchor area and feeling to make

sure there are no obstructions over

the LATCH anchors, such as seat

belt webbing or seat cushion mate-

rial. The child restraint will not be

secured properly if the LATCH an-

chors are obstructed.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child

restraint using LATCH system:

1. Adjust the rear seatback to the upright

position.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

SSS0645

Front-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 3

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchors.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Black plate (46,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0646

Front-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 3

4. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback. If

necessary, adjust or remove the headrest

to obtain the correct child restraint fit. (See

“HEAD RESTRAINTS” earlier in this sec-

tion.)

If the headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

headrest when the child restraint is re-

moved.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable headrest and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child restraint.

SSS0647

Front-facing — step 5

5. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT” earlier in this section.)

SSS0638

Front-facing — step 7

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the seat near the

LATCH attachment path. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)

from side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment holds

the restraint in place. If the restraint is not

secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as

necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (47,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4

through 7.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

SSS0648

Rear-facing (webbing-mounted) — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is

properly attached to the lower anchors.

SSS0649

Rear-facing (rigid-mounted) — step 2

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Black plate (48,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

SSS0650

Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the seat near the

LATCH attachment path. The child restraint

should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)

from side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment holds

the restraint in place. If the restraint is not

secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as

necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3

through 4.

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (49,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0100

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

.Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

passenger seat. Front air bags in-

flate with great force. A rear-facing

child restraint could be struck by the

front air bag in a crash and could

seriously injure or kill your child.

.NISSAN recommends that child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat.

However, if you must install a front-

facing child restraint in the front

passenger seat, move the passen-

ger seat to the rearmost position.

Also, be sure the front passenger air

bag status light is illuminated to

indicate the passenger air bag is

OFF. See “Front passenger air bag

and status light” later in this section

for details.

.The three-point seat belt in your

vehicle is equipped with an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which

must be used when installing a child

restraint.

.Failure to use the ALR mode will

result in the child restraint not being

properly secured. The restraint

could tip over or otherwise be un-

secured and cause injury to the child

in a sudden stop or collision.

.When using the rear center seat belt

to install a child restraint, make sure

the connector tongue and the seat

belt tongue are secured. Do not use

the seat belt with only the seat belt

tongue attached. This could result in

serious personal injury in case of an

accident or sudden stop.

.A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

The instructions in this section apply to child

restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts

in the rear seat or the front passenger seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Black plate (50,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0640

Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear

seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. Adjust the rear seatback to the upright

position.

If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

front-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the seatback. If necessary,

adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest

(front passenger seat only) to obtain the

correct child restraint fit. (See “HEAD

RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section.)

If the head restraint/headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

SSS0360B

Front-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for belt routing.

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (51,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0651

Front-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0652

Front-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0653

Front-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (rear seat installation only). (See “TOP

TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT” ear-

lier in this section.) Do not install child

restraints that require the use of a top tether

strap to seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Black plate (52,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0641

Front-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the seat near the

seat belt path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as

necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode

by trying to pull more seat belt out of the

retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt

webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is

in the ALR mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 9.

SSS0823

Front-facing — step 11

11. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger

air bag and status light” later in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (53,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0100

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear

seat:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for belt routing.

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Black plate (54,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0656

Rear-facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the child

restraint; press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint with

your hand to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up on

the seat belt.

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the seat near the

seat belt path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as

necessary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (55,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode

by trying to pull more seat belt out of the

retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat

belt webbing out of the retractor, the

retractor is in the ALR mode.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

SSS0099

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

.Infants and small children should

always be placed in an appropriate

child restraint while riding in the

vehicle. Failure to use a child re-

straint or booster seat can result in

serious injury or death.

.Infants and small children should

never be carried on your lap. It is not

possible for even the strongest

adult to resist the forces of a severe

accident. The child could be crushed

between the adult and parts of the

vehicle. Also, do not put the same

seat belt around both your child and

yourself.

.NISSAN recommends that the boos-

ter seat be installed in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat. If you must install a

booster seat in the front seat, see

“BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION”

later in this section.

.A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that has

a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a

three-point type seat belt with a

booster seat can result in a serious

injury in sudden stop or collision.

.Improper use or improper installa-

tion of a booster seat can increase

the risk or severity of injury for both

the child and other occupants of the

vehicle and can lead to serious

injury or death in an accident.

.Do not use towels, books, pillows or

other items in place of a booster

seat. Items such as these may move

BOOSTER SEATS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Black plate (56,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

during normal driving or a collision

and result in serious injury or death.

Booster seats are designed to be

used with a lap/shoulder belt. Boos-

ter seats are designed to properly

route the lap and shoulder portions

of the seat belt over the strongest

portions of a child’s body to provide

the maximum protection during a

collision.

.Follow all of the booster seat man-

ufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use. When purchasing a

booster seat, be sure to select one

which will fit your child and vehicle.

It may not be possible to properly

install some types of booster seats

in your vehicle.

.If the booster seat and seat belt is

not used properly, the risk of a child

being injured in a collision or a

sudden stop greatly increases.

.Adjustable seatbacks should be

positioned to fit the booster seat,

but as upright as possible.

.After placing the child in the booster

seat and fastening the seat belt,

make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the abdomen.

.Do not put the shoulder belt behind

the child or under the child’s arm. If

you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, see “BOOSTER SEAT

INSTALLATION” later in this section.

.When your booster seat is not in

use, keep it secured with a seat belt

to prevent it from being thrown

around in case of a sudden stop or

accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the booster

seat.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

.Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (57,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

LRS0453

.Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat *

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat *

2should be used.

LRS0464

.If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with

your child. Always follow all recommended

procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that booster

seats be installed in the rear seat.

However, if you must install a booster

seat in the front passenger seat, move

the passenger’s seat to the rearmost

position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

when using a booster seat with the

seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Black plate (58,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0640

Front passenger seat

1. Adjust the rear seatback to the upright

position.

If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

LRS0451

Rear center position

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If

necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. (See “HEAD RESTRAINTS”

earlier in this section.)

If the head restraint/headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the boos-

ter seat is removed.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

LRS0452

Rear outboard position

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt

routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (59,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

LRS0454

Front passenger seat

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT

BELT” earlier in this section.

SSS0823

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not be

illuminated depending on the size of the

child and the type of booster seat used.

(See “Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.)

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information concern-

ing the following systems:

.Driver and passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

.Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

.Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

.Seat belt pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head and

chest of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the chest area of the

driver and front passenger in certain side impact

collisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system: This

system can help cushion the impact force to the

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

Black plate (60,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side impact or

rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain

and rollover air bags are designed to inflate on

the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a

rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are

designed to inflate and remain inflated for a

short period of time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection

provided by the driver and passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away from

the steering wheel, instrument panel and door

finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this

section for instructions and precautions on seat

belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

SSS0131

SSS0132

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (61,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower se-

verity frontal collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

.The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag

status light is lit or if the front

passenger seat is unoccupied. See

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.

.The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the

seat with both feet on the floor. The

front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, if you are

unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-

ting sideways or out of position in

any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may

also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the front air bag if you are up

against it when it inflates. Always sit

back against the seatback and as

far-away as practical from the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-

ways use the seat belts.

.The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with

sensors that detect if the seat belts

are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag

System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage then

inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury

in an accident.

.The front passenger seat is

equipped with an occupant classifi-

cation sensor (pattern sensor) that

turns the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This

sensor is only used in this seat.

Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

.Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could in-

crease the risk that they are injured

if the front air bag inflates.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

Black plate (62,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (63,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.Never let children ride unrestrained

or extend their hands or face out of

the window. Do not attempt to hold

them in your lap or arms. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the illustrations.

.Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side

air bags or curtain and rollover air

bags inflate if they are not properly

restrained. Pre-teens and children

should be properly restrained in the

rear seat, if possible.

.Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child.

See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in

this section for details.

SSS0059A

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

Black plate (64,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover supple-

mental air bags:

.The side air bags and curtain and

rollover air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a frontal

impact, rear impact or lower severity

side collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk

or severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

.The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain and rollover air bags are

most effective when you are sitting

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor. The side

air bag and curtain and rollover air

bag inflate with great force. Do not

allow anyone to place their hand,

leg or face near the side air bag on

the side of the seatback of the front

seat or near the side roof rails. Do

not allow anyone sitting in the front

seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window

or lean against the door. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the previous

illustrations.

.When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly re-

strained. Some examples of danger-

ous riding positions are shown in

the illustrations.

.Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (65,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSS0847

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bag modules

4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)

5. Occupant classification system control unit

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bags

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag inflators

8. Seat belt pretensioners

9. Satellite sensors

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-

TEM (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is designed

to meet certification requirements under U.S.

regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.

However, all of the information, cautions

and warnings in this manual still apply and

must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel; the

passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is

mounted in the instrument panel above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher severity

frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain

frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is

not always an indication of proper front air bag

operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has

dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors

information from the crash zone sensor, satellite

sensor, Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt

buckle sensors and occupant classification

sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and seat belt

usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the

occupant classification sensor is also monitored.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Black plate (66,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Based on information from the sensors, only one

front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on

the crash severity and whether the front

occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally,

the front passenger air bag may be automatically

turned OFF under some conditions, depending

on the information provided by the occupant

classification sensor. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light

will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the

light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will

be off). (See “Front passenger air bag and

status light” later in this section for further

details.) One front air bag inflating does not

indicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If

you are considering modification of your vehicle

due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in

the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the head

and chest of the front occupants. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,

an inflating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do

not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver

and passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the air bag module during

inflation.

The front air bags will deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

SSS0823

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protection.

Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats,

seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (67,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light

is located on the instrument panel below the air

conditioner controls. The light operates as

follows:

.Unoccupied passenger seat: The

light is OFF and the front passenger air bag

is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

.Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The light illuminates to

indicate that the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

.Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meets the conditions outlined in this

section: The light is OFF to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is opera-

tional.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as described

below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion

and is designed to detect an occupant and

objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag

System is designed to turn the passenger air

bag OFF in accordance with the regulations.

Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in

the regulations is on the seat, the occupant

classification sensor can detect it and cause the

air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure

to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly

for the most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate

child restraints and booster seats be properly

installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the

occupant classification sensor is designed to

operate as described above to turn the front

passenger air bag OFF for specified child

restraints. Failing to properly secure child

restrains and to use the Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)

may allow the restraint to tip or move in an

accident or sudden stop. This can also result in

the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. (See “CHILD RESTRAINTS”

earlierinthissectionforproperuseand

installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object being detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-

pied. The light will not illuminate when the front

passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Black plate (68,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be

that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting

on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may

not be illuminated, depending on the size of the

child and the type of child restraint being used. If

the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure that

the child restraint is installed properly, the seat

belt is used properly and the occupant is

positioned properly. If the air bag status light is

not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status

light will take a few seconds to register a change

in the passenger seat status. However, if the

seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status

light will remain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area,

will blink. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

.Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

.Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not

place heavy objects on the seat that

will leave permanent impressions in

the seat. Such objects can damage

the seat or occupant classification

sensor (pattern sensor). This can

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.

This can damage the seat or occu-

pant classification sensor. This can

also affect the operation of the air

bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

.Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you

may severely burn yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the supplemental air bag system.

This is to prevent accidental infla-

tion of the supplemental air bag or

damage to the supplemental air bag

system.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the front air bag sys-

tem.

.Tampering with the supplemental

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and

the instrument panel assembly by

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (69,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

placing material over the steering

wheel pad and above the instrument

panel or by installing additional trim

material around the air bag system.

.Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result in

serious personal injury. For exam-

ple, do not change the front seats by

placing material on the seat cushion

or by installing additional trim ma-

terial, such as seat covers, on the

seat that is not specifically designed

to assure proper air bag operation.

Additionally, do not stow any ob-

jects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback.

Such objects may interfere with the

proper operation of the occupant

classification sensor.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the seat belt system. This may

affect the front air bag system.

Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal in-

jury.

.Work on and around the front air

bag system should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. The

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not

be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the air bag system.

.A cracked windshield should be

replaced immediately by a qualified

repair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS0848

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-

PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND

ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-

PACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMEN-

TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside of

the seatback of the front seats. The curtain and

rollover air bags are located in the side roof rails.

These systems are designed to meet voluntary

guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-

of-position occupants. However, all of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The side air bags and curtain and rollover air

bags are designed to inflate in higher severity

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

Black plate (70,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

side collisions, although they may inflate if the

forces in another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity side impact. They are

designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle

is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side

collisions. Curtain and rollover air bags are also

designed to inflate in certain types of rollover

collisions or near rollovers.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain and

rollover air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain and rollover

air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not

harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should

be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest

and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain

and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in the front and

rear outboard seating positions. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,

side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags

may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air

bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover

air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the occupants in the outboard seating positions.

Because of this, the force of the side air bags

and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, these air bag modules

during inflation. The side air bags and curtain

and rollover air bags will deflate quickly after the

collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain and rollover

air bags operate only when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

.Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door

finisher and the front seat. Such

objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if a side

air bag inflates.

.Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain and rollover air bag

system components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of this side air bag and curtain and

rollover air bags. This is to prevent

damage to or accidental inflation of

the side-impact air bag and curtain

side-impact and rollover air bag

systems.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation

of the side air bag and curtain and

rollover air bag systems.

.Tampering with the supplemental

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing

material near the seatbacks or by

installing additional trim material,

1-56 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (71,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

such as seat covers, around the side

air bag.

.Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain and rollover air bag

systems should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. The

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not

be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the side air bag and curtain

and rollover air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide

the buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

.The pretensioners cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

.If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but a pretensioner

is not activated, be sure to have the

pretensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced by a NISSAN

dealer.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the pretensioner system. This is

to prevent damage to or accidental

activation of the pretensioners.

Tampering with the pretensioner

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.Work around and on the preten-

sioner system should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the pretensioner system.

.If you need to dispose of a preten-

sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Correct preten-

sioner disposal procedures are set

forthintheappropriateNISSAN

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal

injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunc-

tion with the front air bag system. The preten-

sioner system also activates with the curtain and

rollover air bags in certain types of rollover

collisions or near rollovers. Working with the

seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. The

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Black plate (72,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow

the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to

reduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner

system, the supplemental air bag warning light

will not come on, will flash intermittently or

will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after

the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON

position. In this case, the pretensioner may not

function properly. They must be checked and

repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS1016

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle

as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag

The warning labels *

1are located on the

surface of the sun visors.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,

front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt

pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits

include Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone

sensor, satellite sensors, occupant classification

system, front air bag modules, side air bag

modules, curtain and rollover air bag modules,

pretensioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

1-58 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Black plate (73,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.

This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain and rollover air bag and preten-

sioner systems may not operate properly. It must

be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to

the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-

over air bag and/or pretensioner sys-

tems will not operate in an accident. To

help avoid injury to yourself or others,

have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-

CEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and

rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed

to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a

reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemen-

tal air bag warning light will remain illuminated

after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-

ment of these systems should be done only by a

NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain

and rollover air bags and pretensioners and

related parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The ignition

switch should always be in the LOCK position

when working under the hood or inside the

vehicle.

WARNING

.Once a front air bag, side air bag or

curtain and rollover air bag has

inflated, the air bag module will

not function again and must be

replaced. Additionally, if any of the

front air bags inflate, the activated

pretensioners must also be re-

placed. The air bag module and

pretensioner system should be re-

placed by a NISSAN dealer. The air

bag modules and pretensioner sys-

tem cannot be repaired.

.The front air bag, side air bag and

curtain and rollover air bag systems,

and pretensioner system should be

inspected by a NISSAN dealer if

there is any damage to the front

end or side portion of the vehicle.

.If you need to dispose of a supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems, or scrap the vehicle, contact a

NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemen-

tal air bag and pretensioner system

disposal procedures are set forth in

theappropriateNISSANService

Manual. Incorrect disposal proce-

dures could cause personal injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

Black plate (7,1)

2 Instruments and controls

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Instrument panel ................................................ 2-2

Meters and gauges............................................. 2-4

Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-5

Tachometer................................................... 2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..................... 2-6

Fuel gauge ................................................... 2-7

Compass (if so equipped) .................................... 2-7

Zone variation change procedure ....................... 2-9

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ....... 2-10

Checking bulbs ........................................... 2-10

Warning lights ............................................. 2-10

Indicator lights............................................. 2-14

Audible reminders ........................................ 2-16

Dot matrix liquid crystal display............................ 2-17

Indicators for operation.................................. 2-18

Indicators for maintenance.............................. 2-20

Trip computer.............................................. 2-21

Security systems.............................................. 2-25

Vehicle security system (if so equipped) ............ 2-25

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ................. 2-27

Windshield wiper and washer switch .................... 2-28

Rain-sensing auto wiper system

(if so equipped) ........................................... 2-29

Rear window wiper and washer switch.................. 2-30

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch..... 2-31

Headlight and turn signal switch .......................... 2-32

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) .................... 2-32

Headlight switch .......................................... 2-32

Turn signal switch ........................................ 2-35

Fog light switch (if so equipped)...................... 2-35

Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-36

Horn ............................................................. 2-36

Heated seats (if so equipped) ............................. 2-37

Clock ............................................................ 2-38

Models without color display........................... 2-38

Models with color display............................... 2-38

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........... 2-39

Power outlet ................................................... 2-39

Cigarette lighter and ashtray (if so equipped).......... 2-40

Storage ......................................................... 2-41

Cup holders................................................ 2-41

Sunglasses holder........................................ 2-42

Glove box .................................................. 2-43

Console box ............................................... 2-43

Storage box (if so equipped) .......................... 2-44

Cargo floor box ........................................... 2-45

Luggage side box......................................... 2-45

Cargo cover (if so equipped) .......................... 2-45

Luggage hooks............................................ 2-46

Roof rack (if so equipped).............................. 2-47

Coat hooks................................................. 2-48

Black plate (8,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Windows ....................................................... 2-48

Power windows ........................................... 2-48

Moonroof (if so equipped) .................................. 2-51

Automatic moonroof and sunshades ................. 2-51

Interior lights ................................................... 2-53

Map lights .................................................. 2-53

Personal lights............................................. 2-53

Interior light control switch ............................. 2-53

Mood lights .................................................... 2-54

Vanity mirror lights............................................ 2-55

Cargo lights.................................................... 2-55

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) .... 2-55

Programming HomeLink®............................... 2-56

Programming HomeLink®for Canadian

customers .................................................. 2-57

Operating the HomeLink®Universal

Transceiver ................................................. 2-58

Programming trouble-diagnosis ....................... 2-58

Clearing the programmed information................ 2-58

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®button ........ 2-58

If your vehicle is stolen .................................. 2-58

Black plate (76,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0627

1. Side ventilator

2. Power lift gate switch*

3. Headlight, fog light* and turn signal switch

4. Fuel-filler door opener switch

5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)*

— Audio control*

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System control*

6. Meters and gauges

7. Steering wheel

— Horn

— Driver supplemental air bag

— Power steering system

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches

9. Wiper and washer switch

10. Push-button ignition switch

11. Center ventilator

12. Center display/Center color display*/Navigation

system**

13. Heater/air conditioner or

Center multi-function control panel*

— Navigation system**

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

— Audio system

14. Hazard warning flasher switch

15. Front passenger supplemental air bag

16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

17. Hood release handle

18. Power lift gate main switch

19. Power seatback switch*

20. Fuse box cover

21. Parking brake

22. Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch

23. Intelligent Key port

24. Audio system

— Clock

25. Heated seat switch*

26. Selector lever

27. Front passenger air bag status light

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

Black plate (77,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

28. Power outlet

29. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch*

30. Rear window and outside mirror* defroster switch

31. Heater/air conditioner control or Audio system

32. Glove box

*: if so equipped

**: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-3

Black plate (78,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SSI0377

1. Instrument brightness control switch

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Warning/indicator lights

6. Trip computer switch

7. Dot matrix liquid crystal display

8. Engine coolant temperature gauge

9. Vehicle information display

— Odometer/twin trip odometer

— Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator

10. RESET switch for trip odometer

The needle indicators may move slightly

after the ignition switch is pushed to the

LOCK position. This is not a malfunction.

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Black plate (79,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3571

Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

SIC3572

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer *

1and twin trip odometer *

are displayed when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch *

3on the

right side of the combination meter panel

changes the display as follows:

TRIP A ?TRIP B ?TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch *

3for

more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to

zero.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Black plate (80,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3573

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the

engine into the red zone *

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

SIC3574

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the gauge needle points

within the zone *

1shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant

temperature near the hot (H) end of the

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease temperature. If gauge is over

the normal range, stop the vehicle as

soon as safely possible. If the engine is

overheated, continued operation of the

vehicle may seriously damage the en-

gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-

HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for immediate action required.

2-6 Instruments and controls

Black plate (81,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3575

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge

registers “E” (Empty).

The low fuel warning appears on the dot

matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel tank is

getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,

preferably before the gauge reaches “E”. There

will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when

the fuel gauge needle reaches “E”.

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

.If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon

as possible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by

a NISSAN dealer.

.For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

later in this section.

SIC3181

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the compass display *

Bwill indicate

the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

COMPASS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

Black plate (82,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass

by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at

less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also

calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle

on your everyday route. The compass will be

calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete

circles.

To turn on and off the compass manually, push

the switch *

Awhile the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

SIC0611B

Zone map

2-8 Instruments and controls

Black plate (83,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCE-

DURE

The difference between magnetic north and

geographical north is known as variance. In

some areas, this difference can sometimes be

great enough to cause false compass readings.

Follow these instructions to set the variance for

your particular location if this happens:

1. Push the switch for more than 3

seconds. The current zone number will

appear in the display.

2. Find your current location and variance

number on the zone map.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

3. Push the switch repeatedly until the

new zone number appears in the display,

then release the switch. After you release

the switch, the display will show a compass

direction within a few seconds.

.If the compass deviates from the correct

indication soon after repeated adjust-

ment, have the compass checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

.The compass may not indicate the

correct compass point in tunnels or

while driving up or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correct com-

pass point when the vehicle moves to an

area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

.Do not install a ski rack, antenna,

etc., which are attached to the

vehicle by means of a magnet. They

affect the operation of the compass.

.When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as it may cause the liquid

cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-9

Black plate (84,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD

models)* Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Seat belt warning light Overdrive off indicator light

Brake warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light

(AWD models)* Small light indicator light

Charge warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light

Intelligent Key warning light Front passenger air bag status light *: if so equipped

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and push the ignition switch to the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on (if so equipped):

, or , , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off (if so equipped):

, or , , , , , ,

If any light does not come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

electrical system. Have the system checked by

a NISSAN dealer.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the dot matrix crystal display on the

speedometer. (See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID

CRYSTAL DISPLAY” later in this section.)

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (AWD models)

The light comes on when the ignition switch is

pushed to ON. It turns off soon after the engine

is started.

If the AWD system malfunctions, or the diameter

of the front and the rear wheels are different, the

warning light will either remain illuminated or

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-10 Instruments and controls

Black plate (85,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

blink. (See “ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.)

CAUTION

.If the warning light comes on while

driving there may be a malfunction

in the AWD system. Reduce the

vehicle speed and have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

.If the AWD warning light blinks

when you are driving:

— blinks rapidly (about twice a

second):

Pull off the road in a safe area,

and idle the engine. The driving

mode will change to 2WD to

prevent the AWD system from

malfunctioning. If the warning

light turns off, you can drive

again.

— blinks slowly (about once every

2 seconds):

Pull off the road in a safe area,

and idle the engine. Check that

all tire sizes are the same, tire

pressure is correct and tires are

not worn.

.If the warning light is still on after

the above operations, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible.

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates

the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-

tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light comes on when the parking brake is

applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. (See “BRAKE FLUID” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warningsystemcheckedbyaNISSAN

dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

brake system checked, and if necessary re-

paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See

“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

earlier in this section.)

Instruments and controls 2-11

Black plate (86,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.Your brake system may not be

working properly if the warning light

is on. Driving could be dangerous. If

you judge it to be safe, drive care-

fully to the nearest service station

for repairs. Otherwise, have your

vehicle towed because driving it

could be dangerous.

.Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your stop-

ping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

.If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Key warning light

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

This light warns of a malfunction with the

electrical steering lock system (if so equipped)

or the Intelligent Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine is

stopped, it may be impossible to free the

steering lock (if so equipped) or to start the

engine. If the light comes on while the engine is

running, you can drive the vehicle. However in

these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair

as soon as possible.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light

illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

2-12 Instruments and controls

Black plate (87,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. The low tire pressure warning

light does not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to

the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-

SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE

PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1

minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-

SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

.If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch pushed ON, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

.If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle

speed, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. Driving with un-

der-inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the

likelihood of tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shownontheTireandLoading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light stays on after adjusting the

tire pressure and driving over 16

MPH (25 km/h), have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer. If you

have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

CAUTION

.The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure

to check the tire pressure regularly.

.If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

.Be sure to correctly install the

specified size of tires to the four

Instruments and controls 2-13

Black plate (88,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

wheels.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the master warning light illuminates if any of the

following are displayed on the dot matrix liquid

crystal display:

.No key warning

.Low fuel warning

.Low washer fluid warning

.Parking brake release warning

.Door/lift gate open warning

See “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS-

PLAY” later in this section.

Seat belt warning light

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat

belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition

switch is pushed to the ON position, and will

remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat is

occupied. For 6 seconds after the ignition

switch is in the ON position, the system does

not activate the warning light for the front

passenger.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

supplemental front air bag and supplemental

side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems

and/or pretensioner seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag

and pretensioner systems needs servicing and

your vehicle must be taken to your nearest

NISSAN dealer.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental

Restraint Systems (air bag systems) and/or the

pretensioners may not function properly.

For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-

TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-

over air bag and/or pretensioner sys-

tems will not operate in an accident. To

help avoid injury to yourself or others,

have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK

indicator light (AWD models)

This light illuminates when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1

second.

When selecting the LOCK mode while the

engine is running, this light will illuminate. (See

“ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.)

2-14 Instruments and controls

Black plate (89,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) position indicator light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the indicator shows the automatic

selector shift position. (See “CONTINUOUSLY

VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

Cruise indicator light

Cruise main switch indicator:

This light illuminates when the cruise control

main switch is pushed. The light turns off when

the main switch is pushed again. When the

cruise main switch indicator light illuminates, the

cruise control system is operational. (See

“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.)

Cruise malfunction:

If the cruise indicator light blinks while the

engine is running, it may indicate the cruise

control system is not functioning properly. Have

the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See

“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.)

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light

will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion,see“NISSANADVANCEDAIRBAG

SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light (Blue)

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control and/or

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal-

function.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on

steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or

if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make

sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US

gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine

is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not

ready for an emission control system inspection/

maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR

INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in

the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section.)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will come on in

one of two ways:

.Malfunction indicator light on steady — An

emission control system and/or CVT mal-

function has been detected. Check the fuel-

filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few

driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

.Malfunction indicator light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

Instruments and controls 2-15

Black plate (90,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system

damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

and/or CVT system checked and re-

paired as necessary could lead to poor

driveability, reduced fuel economy, and

possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light

The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when

the overdrive off mode is selected.

For additional information, see ““CONTINU-

OUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)” in

the “5. Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Slip indicator light

This light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting

the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction

limits. The road surface may be slippery.

Small light indicator light

The light comes on when the front park, side

marker, tail and license plate lights are on.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

indicator light

The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates that the VDC system is not operating.

When the VDC off indicator light and slip

indicator light come on with the VDC system

turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact

that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operat-

ing, for example the VDC system may not be

functioning properly. Have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction occurs in

the system, the VDC system function will be

canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For

additional information, see “VEHICLE DYNAMIC

CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or

LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the

Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take

the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the

vehicle.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Black plate (91,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side door is

opened with the light switch in the or

position and the ignition switch in the ACC

or OFF position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven with

the parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle and

release the parking brake.

Seat belt warning chime

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds

unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will

first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the warning

sound is heard.

SIC3576

The dot matrix liquid crystal display *

1is

located in the speedometer, and it displays,

the key operation information and other warn-

ings and information.

For the detail about the Intelligent Key System,

see “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL

DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-17

Black plate (92,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3577

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator

This indicator appears when the selector lever is

in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed.

You can start the engine directly in any position.

2. Steering lock release malfunction

indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the steering wheel

cannot be released from the LOCK position.

If this indicator appears, push the push-button

ignition switch while lightly turning the steering

2-18 Instruments and controls

Black plate (93,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

wheel right and left.

3. Key insertion indicator

This indicator appears when the key needs to be

inserted into the key port.

If this indicator appears, insert the key into the

key port in the correct direction. (See “PUSH-

BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.)

4. Key removal indicator

This indicator appears when the driver’s door is

opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and the key placed in the key

port. A key reminder chime also sounds.

If this indicator appears, remove the key from the

key port and take it with you when leaving the

vehicle.

5. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the following

conditions.

No key inside the vehicle:

The warning appears when the door is closed

with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle

and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

Unregistered key:

The warning appears when the ignition switch is

pushed from the LOCK position and the key

cannot be recognized by the system. You cannot

start the engine with an unregistered key. Use

the registered key.

See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for

more details.

6. SHIFT “P” warning

This warning appears when the ignition switch is

pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever

in any position except the P (Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position or push the ignition

switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound. (See

“INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section.)

7. “PUSH” warning

This warning appears when the selector lever is

moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition

switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”

warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF position,

perform the following procedure:

SHIFT “P” warning ?(Move the selector

lever to “P”) ?PUSH warning ?(Push

the ignition switch ?ignition switch position

is turned to ON) ?PUSH warning ?

(Push the ignition switch ?ignition switch

position is turned to OFF)

8. Key battery discharge indicator

This indicator appears when the key battery is

running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery with

a new one. (See “BATTERY REPLACEMENT” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

9. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle speed is

above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is

applied.

10. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level in the

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches the empty (E) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining

in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches

the empty (E) position.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Black plate (94,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

11. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer tank fluid

is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary.

(See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

12. Door/lift gate open warning (ignition

switch is in the ON position)

This warning appears if any of the doors and/or

the lift gate are open or not closed securely. The

vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the

display.

13. “Time to rest” indicator

This indicator appears when the set “time to

rest” indicator activates. You can set the time for

up to 6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in

this section.)

14. Low outside temperature warning

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 378F(38C). The warning can be set not

to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later

in this section.)

SIC3578

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset

the distance for changing the engine oil. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset

the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing tires. You can set or reset the

distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COM-

PUTER” later in this section.)

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil

filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance

for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPU-

TER” later in this section.)

More maintenance reminders are also available

on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE

INFO BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air

conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section.)

2-20 Instruments and controls

Black plate (95,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3580

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located on

the right side of the combination meter panel. To

operate the trip computer, push the side or front

of the switches as shown above.

Aswitch

Bswitch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the switch *

Each time the switch *

Ais pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption ?Average fuel

consumption and speed ?Elapsed time and

trip odometer ?Distance to empty (dte) ?

Outside air temperature (ICY) ?Setting ?

Warning check

SIC3673

Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption mode shows the

current fuel consumption.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Black plate (96,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3674

Average fuel consumption (MPG or l

(liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or km/h)

Fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the switch *

for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is

also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows “——”.

Speed:

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is

done by pushing the switch *

Bfor longer

than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is

also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. The

first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

“——”.

SIC3675

Elapsed time and trip odometer (mls or

km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time since

the last reset. The displayed time can be reset

by pushing the switch *

Bfor longer than

1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the

same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the total

distance the vehicle has been driven since the

last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the

switch *

Bfor longer than 1 second. (The

elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

2-22 Instruments and controls

Black plate (104,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.High — High sensitive operation

.Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off,

push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull

down the lever to the LO or HI position.

CAUTION

Do not touch the rain sensor and

around it when the wiper switch is in

the INT position and the ignition switch

is in the ON position. The wipers may

operate unexpectedly and cause to an

injury or a wiper damage.

.The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the switch

is left in the INT position, the wipers

may operate unexpectedly when dirt,

fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck

on or around the sensor. The wipers

may also operate when exhaust gas or

moisture affect the rain sensor.

.The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain

sensor even if it is raining.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the rear window

glass and obscure your vision. Warm

the rear window with the defroster

before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

.Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that is

on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-

mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again

to operate the wiper.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

2-30 Instruments and controls

Black plate (110,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

.If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off the

road.

.Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the high-

way unless unusual circumstances

force you to drive so slowly that

your vehicle might become a hazard

to other traffic.

.Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are

on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition

switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

SIC3586

To sound the horn, push the pad area *

Aof the

steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH HORN

2-36 Instruments and controls

Black plate (111,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

.The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

.Do not use the seat heater for

extended periods or when no one

is using the seat.

.Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

.Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

.Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately

with a dry cloth.

.When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

.If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SIC2770

The seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The

switches located on the center console and rear

doors (if so equipped for rear seats) can be

operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

1For high heat, push the HI (High) side of

the switch.

2For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of

the switch.

The indicator light in the switch *

3will

illuminate when the heater is on.

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-37

Black plate (112,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to

the level position. Make sure the indicator

light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

off the switch.

SIC3649

MODELS WITHOUT COLOR DISPLAY

The digital clock (in the audio unit) displays the

time when the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

Adjusting the time

1. Push and hold the CLOCK button *

1for

more than 2 seconds until the display shows

“Hour Adjust”.

2. Turn the AUDIO knob *

2to adjust hours.

3. Push the CLOCK button *

1or AUDIO

knob *

2to enter. The display will show

“Minute Adjust”.

4. Turn the AUDIO knob *

2to adjust minutes.

5. Push the CLOCK button *

1or AUDIO

knob *

2to enter.

The display will return to the regular clock

display after 10 seconds.

If the power supply is disconnected, the clock

will not indicate the correct time.

Readjust the time.

MODELS WITH COLOR DISPLAY

For adjusting the time, see “Clock settings” in

the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems” section.

CLOCK

2-38 Instruments and controls

Black plate (114,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

To use the power outlet, pull the cover as

illustrated.

CAUTION

.The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use.

.Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

draw. Do not use double adapters or

more than one electrical accessory.

.Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

.Avoid using power outlet when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear

window defroster is on.

.This power outlet is not designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit.

.Push the plug in as far as it will go.

If good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

.Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical acces-

sory being used is turned OFF.

.When not in use, be sure to close

the cap. Do not allow water to

contact the outlet.

SIC3588

To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down and

release it *

To empty the ashtray, pull out *

The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Push the lighter in all the way *

3, then release

it. When the lighter is heated, it will spring out.

Return the lighter to its original position after

use.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND

ASHTRAY (if so equipped)

2-40 Instruments and controls

Black plate (118,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3591

Rear

To open, push the knob *

1and pull out *

SIC3593

STORAGE BOX (if so equipped)

To open, push the storage box lid *

1as

illustrated.

The inner tray can be removed *

2as illustrated.

Do not place valuable items in the storage

box.

Do not use the storage box as an ashtray.

SIC3655

Type A

SIC3656

Type B

2-44 Instruments and controls

Black plate (119,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

CARGO FLOOR BOX

Type A

1. To open the cargo floor box, pull the strap

2. Remove the strap *

Bfrom the back side of

the board and hang it on the opening of the

lift gate.

Type B

To open the cargo floor box, push *

A. To close,

push the lid until the lock latches.

The net partitions can be removed *

Bto make

a larger storage space.

The cargo floor box needs to be removed when

you need a spare tire. (See “FLAT TIRE” in the

“6. In case of emergency” section.)

CAUTION

To avoid damage, do not load more

than 22 lbs (10 kg) of cargo into the

cargo floor box.

SIC3594

LUGGAGE SIDE BOX

To open the luggage side box, pull up the strap.

SIC3595

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo

area hidden from the outside.

To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both

sides on the hooks *

Instruments and controls 2-45

Black plate (121,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

ropes and hooks.

.Unsecured cargo can become dan-

gerous in an accident or sudden

stop.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than

22 lb (10 kg) *

Aor 7 lb (3 kg) *

Bto a

single hook.

SIC3597

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof

rack. Do not load more than 165 lb (75 kg)

(black) or 220 lb (100 kg) (silver) on the roof

rails. Observe the maximum load limit shown on

the crossbars or roof carriers when you attach

them on the roof rails. Contact a NISSAN dealer

for crossbar or other equipment information. Be

careful that your vehicle does not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and

rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-

cated on the driver’s door pillar). For more

information regarding GVWR and GAWR, see

“VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information” section.

WARNING

.Drive extra carefully when the vehi-

cle is loaded at or near the cargo

carrying capacity, especially if the

significant portion of that load is

carried on the roof rack.

.Heavy loading of the roof rack has

the potential to affect the vehicle

stability and handling during sud-

den or unusual handling maneuvers.

.Roof rack load should be evenly

distributed.

.Do not exceed maximum roof rack

load weight capacity.

.Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing

items from the roof rack. If you cannot

comfortably lift the items onto the roof

Instruments and controls 2-47

Black plate (123,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3283A

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push down *

Aor

pull up *

Bthe switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button *

Cis pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

SIC3241

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, push down or pull up the

switch and hold it.

Instruments and controls 2-49

Black plate (125,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts

and child restraints.

.Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

.Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

.Do not place any heavy object on

the moonroof or surrounding area.

.Do not push or pull on the sun-

shade. Doing so can damage the

sunshade.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF AND SUN-

SHADES

The moonroof and sunshades only operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The automatic moonroof and sunshades are

operational for about 45 seconds, even if the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If

the driver’s door or the passenger’s door is

opened during this period of about 45 seconds,

power to the moonroof and sunshades is

canceled.

SIC3598

Sliding sunshade and moonroof

When the OPEN side *

1of the moonroof

switch is pushed, the front and rear sunshades

will fully open. When the switch is pushed again,

the moonroof will fully open.

When the CLOSE side *

2of the moonroof

switch is pushed, the moonroof will automati-

cally close. Push the switch again, and the front

and rear sunshades will close.

When the OPEN or CLOSE side of the moon-

roof switch is pushed to the second detent (*

or *

4), both the sunshade and moonroof will

open or close.

To stop the sunshades or moonroof during the

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-51

Black plate (126,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

operation, push either of the OPEN *

1, CLOSE

2or UP *

5of the switch.

Tilting moonroof

To tilt up the moonroof, push the moonroof

switch to the up position *

To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the

up position *

5or push the CLOSE side *

2of

the switch.

When the moonroof is tilted up, push the

CLOSE side of the moonroof switch to the

second detent *

4. The moonroof will tilt down

and the sunshades will close.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

moonroof.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the moonroof and sunshades when they are

closing, the moonroof will be immediately

opened.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof and sunshades are closed by

automatic operation when the ignition switch is

in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after

the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

If the moonroof and sunshades cannot be

closed automatically when the auto reverse

function activates due to a malfunction, push

and hold the CLOSE side *

2of the moonroof

switch.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initialize the

moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

pushing the CLOSE side *

2of the moon-

roof switch.

2. Push and hold the CLOSE side *

2of the

moonroof switch.

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof or sunshade moves slightly to

the closed position.

4. Push and hold the CLOSE side *

2of the

moonroof switch for 10 seconds.

5. The moonroof and sunshades will fully open

and then close.

6. Check if the moonroof switch operates

normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after

performing the procedure above, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

2-52 Instruments and controls

Black plate (127,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC3249

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on

or off.

SIC3250

PERSONAL LIGHTS

Rear

Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on

or off.

SIC3251

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

The interior light control switch has three

positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position *

1the

map lights and rear personal lights will illumi-

nate.

DOOR position

When the switch is in the DOOR position *

the map lights and rear personal lights will

illuminate under the following conditions:

.ignition switch is switched to the LOCK

position

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-53

Black plate (128,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-

LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door

handle request switch with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened and then closed with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened with the ignition switch

in the ACC or ON position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go off.

The lights will also turn off after 30

minutes when the lights remain illumi-

nated after the ignition switch has been

pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to

prevent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

When the auto interior illumination is set to the

OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION

AND SETTINGS” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air

conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section), the lights will illuminate under

the following condition:

.any door is opened with the ignition switch

in any position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go off.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position *

3, the

lights will not illuminate, regardless of the

condition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could

result in a discharged battery.

SIC3599

Map lights

The mood lights *

Alocated in the following

positions will illuminate whenever the headlight

switch is in the or position.

.next to the map lights

.under the instrument panel

.under the driver’s power window switch

The mood lights can be adjusted with the

illumination control buttons.

See “Instrument brightness control” earlier in

this section.

MOOD LIGHTS

2-54 Instruments and controls

Black plate (129,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC2064

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when

the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.

The lights will turn off after 30 minutes

when the lights remain illuminated to

prevent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

SIC2131A

When the switch is in the ON position *

1, the

light illuminates while the lift gate is opened.

When the lift gate is closed, the light will turn off.

When the switch is in the OFF position *

2, the

light will turn off.

The lights will turn off after 30 minutes

when the light remain illuminated to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver:

.Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and

security systems.

.Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-

connected, HomeLink®will retain all pro-

gramming.

Once HomeLink®Universal Transceiver is

programmed, retain the original transmit-

ter for future programming procedures

(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon

sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes.

For additional information, see “PRO-

GRAMMING HomeLink®” later in this sec-

tion.

WARNING

.Do not use HomeLink®Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS CARGO LIGHTS HomeLink®UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-55

Black plate (133,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

device must accept any interference that

may be received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and

complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-59

Black plate (137,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

CAUTION

Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System key, which contains

an electrical transponder, to come in

contactwithsaltwater.Thiscould

cause the system to malfunction.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to your

vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-

nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The new

keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer

prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your

vehicle. Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

nents when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when driving. The Intelli-

gent Key is a precision device with a

built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-

ging it, please note the following.

— The Intelligent Key is water

resistant; however, wetting may

damage the Intelligent Key. If

the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is com-

pletely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

foranextendedperiodina

place where temperatures ex-

ceed 1408F (608C).

— Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

near an electric appliance such

as a television set, personal

computer or cellular phone.

— Do not allow the Intelligent Key

to come into contact with water

or salt water, and do not wash it

in a washing machine. This

could affect the system function.

.If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID

code of that Intelligent Key. This will

prevent the Intelligent Key from

unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding

the erasing procedure, please con-

tact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Black plate (139,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2432

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors simultaneously using the

mechanical key.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the

front of the vehicle *

1will lock all doors.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once

to the rear of the vehicle *

2will unlock the

driver’s door. After returning the key to the

neutral position *

3, turning it to the rear

again within 1 minute will unlock all doors.

.You can switch the lock system to the mode

that allows you to open all the doors when

the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE

SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Monitor,

heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section.)

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also allows you

to open and close all door windows.

To open the windows, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second. The door is unlocked and the

window keeps opening while turning the key.

This function can also be performed by pushing

and holding the door UNLOCK button of the

key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYS-

TEM” later in this section.)

To close the windows, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second. The door is locked and the

window keeps closing while turning the key.

SPA2465

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position *

1then close the

door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position *

When locking the door without Intelligent

Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent

Key inside the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Black plate (140,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2300

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock

or unlock all the doors. The switches are located

on the driver’s and front passenger’s door

armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the lock position *

1with the driver’s

or front passenger’s door open, then close the

door.

When locking the door this way, be certain

not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the unlock position *

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front

passenger) is moved to the lock position with

the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open,

all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With

the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in the

Intelligent Key port) and any door open, all doors

will unlock automatically and a chime will sound

after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

.All doors will be locked automatically when

the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24

km/h).

.All doors will be unlocked automatically

when the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF position.

The automatic lock and unlock functions

can be deactivated or activated indepen-

dently of each other.

To deactivate or activate the automatic lock or

unlock system, perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Pushtheignitionswitchtothe“ON”

position.

3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds of

performing step 2:

.To change AUTO UNLOCK settings:

push and hold the power door lock

switch to the position (UNLOCK)

for more than 5 seconds.

.To change AUTO LOCK settings: push

and hold the power door lock switch to

the position (LOCK) for more than

5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will

flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard

indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition must be placed in the OFF and

ON position again between each setting

change.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (141,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2433

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

The child safety rear door lock helps prevent

doors from being opened accidentally, espe-

cially when small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

1, the rear doors can be opened only

from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock

position *

WARNING

.Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

.The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises that radio

waves may affect aircraft navigation

and communication systems. Do not

operate the Intelligent Key while on

an airplane. Make sure the buttons

are not operated unintentionally

when the unit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote controller function

or pushing the request switch on the vehicle

without taking the key out from a pocket or

purse. The operating environment and/or condi-

tions may affect the Intelligent Key system

operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehi-

cle.

.Never leave the Intelligent Key in

the vehicle when you leave the

vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio

waves. Environmental conditions may interfere

with the operation of the Intelligent Key system

under the following operating conditions.

.When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such

as a TV tower, power station and broad-

casting station.

.When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,

and CB radio.

.When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

.When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

.When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Black plate (143,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA1948A

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range *

1from the request switch.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-

ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range *

1is within 31.50 in (80

cm) from each request switch.

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone who does not

carry the Intelligent Key to push the request

switch to lock/unlock the doors. SPA2407

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-

TION

.Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the In-

telligent Key is outside the vehicle.

.After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

.To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

key with you and then lock the doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Black plate (144,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

.The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing

doors with the door handle request switch)

can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHI-

CLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS” in

the “4. Monitor, heater, air conditioner,

audio, phone and voice recognition sys-

tems” section.)

SPA2408

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out from your pocket or bag.

SPA2434

SPA2435

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (145,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch *

Aor the lift gate

request switch *

Bwithin the range of opera-

tion.

When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift

gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn

(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-

tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator

and horn mode” later in this section.

Locking doors

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position, push the ignition switch to the OFF

position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch *

Aor

lift gate request switch *

Bwhile carrying

the Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key

while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch with the Intelligent

Key inside the vehicle.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle, doors can be locked with

another registered Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the door handle request switch *

Aor

the lift gate request switch *

Bonce while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and the

outside chime sounds once. The corre-

sponding door or the lift gate will unlock.

3. Push the request switch again within 1

minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and the

outside chime sounds once again. All the

doors and the lift gate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the request switch while

the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time

period, the request switch is pushed, all doors

will be locked automatically after another 1

minute.

.Opening any door

.Pushing the ignition switch

Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent

Key port

Power lift gate open (if so equipped)

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the power lift gate opener switch *

3. The lift gate will unlock and automatically

open.

4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the

outside chime sounds.

To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate

button on the key, or power lift gate switch on

the instrument panel or lower part of the lift gate.

(See “LIFT GATE” in the “3. Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button *

1is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK button *

2is pushed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Black plate (146,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

twice. When the UNLOCK button is

pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or lift gate request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button) HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or lift gate request switch) HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button) HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (147,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK *

1and UNLOCK *

buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds

to switch the mode from one to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard

indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard

indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator

flashes once and the horn chirps once.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for 60

minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the

power supply to prevent battery discharge.

.The ignition switch is in the ACC position,

and

.All doors are closed, and

.The selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the

Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or

to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,

chime or beep sounds inside and outside the

vehicle and a warning displays in the dot matrix

liquid crystal display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

displays, be sure to check the vehicle and

Intelligent Key.

See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in

this section and “DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYS-

TAL DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Black plate (148,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch

to stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display

and the inside warning chime sounds con-

tinuously.

The selector lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

When shifting the selector lever

to the P (Park) position. The inside warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

When opening the driver’s door

to get out of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent

Key port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-

gent Key port.

When closing the door after get-

ting out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the display,

the outside chime sounds 3 times and the

inside warning chime sounds for a few

seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display

and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF

position and the selector lever is not in

the P (Park) position.

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

When closing the door with the

inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds

and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request switch

or the LOCK button on the

Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (149,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pushed.

The FAA advises that radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and commu-

nication systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Make sure the buttons are not operated

unintentionally when the unit is stored

for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, activate

the panic alarm and open the windows and lift

gate (if so equipped) by pushing the buttons on

the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key can operate at a distance of approximately

33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective

distance depends upon the conditions around

the vehicle.)

The lock and unlock buttons will not operate

when:

.the distance between the Intelligent Key and

the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

.the Intelligent Key battery is completely

discharged.

After locking with the remote keyless entry

function, pull the door handle to make sure the

doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies

depending on the environment. To securely

operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach

the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

SPA2252A

Type A

SPA2436

Type B

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Black plate (150,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

1LOCK button

2UNLOCK button

3Power lift gate button (if so equipped)

4PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift

gate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn

(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-

tion. For details, see “Setting hazard indicator

and horn mode” later in this section.

Locking doors

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position. Make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors and lift gate.*2

3. Push the LOCK button *

4. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock while the ignition switch is in

the ACC or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock while any door is open.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK button *

2once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door will unlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button again within

1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All

the doors and the lift gate will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the UNLOCK button while

the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time

period, the UNLOCK button is pushed, all doors

will be locked automatically after another 1

minute.

.Opening any door

.Pushing the ignition switch

Opening windows

To open the windows, push the door UNLOCK

button *

2for about 3 seconds after the

door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button.

Windows cannot be closed using the button on

the Intelligent Key.

The door windows can be opened or closed by

turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See

“DOORS” earlier in this section.)

Opening/closing lift gate (if so equipped)

1. Push the power lift gate button *

for more than 1 second.

2. The lift gate will automatically open.

The hazard indicator flashes 5 times and the

outside chime sounds for approximately 3

seconds.

To close the lift gate, push the power lift gate

button *

The lift gate will automatically close.

If the button *

3is pushed while the lift

gate is being opened or closed, the lift gate will

reverse.

The power lift gate button *

3cannot be

operated when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you can activate the alarm according to the

following procedure to call attention.

1. Push the PANIC button *

4for more

than 1 second.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (151,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

2. The theft warning alarm will sound and the

headlights will flash for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops under either of the

following conditions.

.It has run for 25 seconds, or

.Any of the buttons is pushed. (Note: the

panic button should be pushed for more

than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button *

1is pushed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK button *

2is pushed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes

twice. When the UNLOCK button is

pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or lift gate request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button) HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or lift gate request switch) HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button) HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Black plate (152,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK *

1and UNLOCK *

buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds

to switch the mode from one to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard

indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard

indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator

flashes once and the horn chirps once.

SPA2437

1. Pull the hood lock release handle *

located below the instrument panel; the

hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever *

2up at the front of the hood

with your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the

hood down and make sure it locks into

place.

WARNING

.Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the

hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

.If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

HOOD

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (153,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.Always be sure the lift gate has

been closed securely to prevent it

from opening while driving.

.Do not drive with the lift gate open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.Always be sure that hands and feet

are clear of the door frame to avoid

injury while closing the lift gate.

SPA2438

OPERATING MANUAL LIFT GATE

To open the lift gate, unlock it and push the

opener switch *

A. Pull up the lift gate to open.

The lift gate can be unlocked by:

.pushing the unlock button on the

Intelligent Key twice.

.pushing the lift gate request switch (if so

equipped).

.pushing the door handle request switch

twice (if so equipped).

.pushing the power door lock switch to the

unlock position.

.inserting the mechanical key into the driver’s

door key cylinder and turning it to the rear of

the vehicle twice.

To close the lift gate, pull down until it securely

locks.

OPERATING POWER LIFT GATE (if so

equipped)

To operate the power lift gate, the selector lever

must be in the P (Park) position.

The power lift gate will not operate if the battery

voltage is low.

LIFT GATE

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Black plate (154,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2461

Power lift gate main switch

The power lift gate operation can be turned on

or off by the power lift gate main switch on the

instrument panel.

When the power lift gate main switch is pushed

to the “OFF” position, the power operation is not

available by the power lift gate switch on the lift

gate and lift gate opener switch.

SPA2439

SPA2462

SPA2463

SPA2440

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (155,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Power open

When the lift gate is fully closed, the lift gate will

fully open automatically by:

.pushing the power lift gate switch *

Aon

the instrument panel

.pushing the lift gate opener switch *

.pushing the power lift gate button *

Con

the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside

chime sounds when the lift gate starts opening.

NOTE:

The lift gate can be opened by the power

lift gate switch *

Aor the lift gate button

Ceven if the lift gate is locked.

The lift gate will individually unlock and

open. Once the lift gate is closed, its lock

will align to the vehicle’s lock or unlock

status.

Power close

When the lift gate is fully opened, the lift gate

will fully close automatically by:

.pushing the power lift gate switch *

Aon

the instrument panel

.pushing the power lift gate switch *

Don

the lower part of the lift gate

.pushing the lift gate release button *

Con

the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside

chime sounds when the lift gate starts closing.

Reverse function

The power lift gate will reverse immediately if

one of the following actions is performed during

power open or power close.

.pushing the power lift gate switch *

Aon

the instrument panel

.pushing the lift gate switch *

Don the lower

part of the lift gate

.pushing the lift gate button *

Con

the Intelligent Key.

The outside chime sounds when the lift gate

starts to reverse.

The power lift gate button *

Con the

Intelligent Key cannot be operated when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Auto reverse function

The auto-reverse function enables the lift gate to

automatically reverse when something is caught

in the lift gate as it is opening or closing. When

the control unit detects an obstacle, the lift gate

will reverse and return to the full open or full

close position.

If a second obstacle is detected, the lift gate

motion will stop and the drive motor will

disengage. The lift gate will enter the manual

mode.

A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the

lift gate. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch

sensor during power close, the lift gate will

reverse and return to the full open position

immediately.

NOTE:

If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed,

the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There is a small distance immediately

before the closed position that cannot

be detected. Make sure that all passen-

gers keep their hands, etc., clear from

the lift gate opening before closing the

lift gate.

Manual mode

If power operation is not available, the lift gate

can be operated manually. Power operation may

not be available if multiple obstacles have been

detected in a single power cycle or if the battery

voltage is low. When the power lift gate main

switch is in the OFF position, the lift gate can be

opened manually by pushing the lift gate opener

switch. If the power lift gate opener switch is

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Black plate (156,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

pushed during power open or close, the power

operation will be canceled and the lift gate can

be operated manually.

SPA2464

Safe Mode

If the gas stays of the lift gate *

1lose pressure,

the power lift gate safe mode is activated. When

thesafemodeisactivated,theliftgate

intermittently closes. Then the lift gate will be

pulled to the closed and latched position by a

motor.

The power lift gate cannot be opened using the

switches at any time in the safe mode.

Do not operate the lift gate again until it is

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.If the power lift gate does not stay

open or if the lift gate unexpectedly

closes at any time, do not operate

the lift gate. There may be a pres-

sure loss in one or both of the lift

gate gas stays. Have the lift gate

inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

.Do not activate the power lift gate if

one or both of the lift gate gas stays

are removed. Damage to the lift

gate or power lift gate mechanisms

may occur.

AUTO CLOSURE

If the lift gate is pulled down to a partly open

position, the lift gate will pull itself to the closed

position.

Do not apply excessive force when the

auto closure is operating. Excessive force

applied may cause the mechanism to

malfunction.

CAUTION

.The lift gate will automatically close

from a partly open position. To avoid

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (157,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

pinching, keep hands and fingers

away from lift gate opening.

.Do not let children operate the lift

gate.

SPA1915

LIFT GATE RELEASE

If the lift gate cannot be opened due to a

discharged battery, follow these steps.

1. Remove the cover inside of the lift gate with

a suitable tool.

2. Move the lever toward the direction *

Aas

illustrated to open the lift gate.

Have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2441

OPENING FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, push the opener

switch located below the instrument panel. To

lock, close the fuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

Black plate (158,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

.Gasoline is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under certain

conditions. You could be burned or

seriously injured if it is misused or

mishandled. Always stop engine

and do not smoke or allow open

flames or sparks near the vehicle

when refueling.

.Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle

shuts off automatically. Continued

refueling may cause fuel overflow,

resulting in fuel spray and possibly

a fire.

.Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It

has a built-in safety valve needed

for proper operation of the fuel

system and emission control sys-

tem. An incorrect cap can result in a

serious malfunction and possible

injury. It could also cause the mal-

function indicator light to come on.

.Never pour fuel into the throttle

body to attempt to start your vehi-

cle.

.Do not fill a portable fuel container

in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-

tricity can cause an explosion of

flammable liquid, vapor or gas in

any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death when

filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on

the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

.If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid

paint damage.

.Insert the cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube, then tighten until the

fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-

en the fuel-filler cap properly may

cause the malfunction indicator

light (MIL) to illuminate. If the

light illuminates because the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-

er.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (159,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2442

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the

cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn

the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are

heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder *

while refueling.

WARNING

.Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose control

of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent.

.Do not adjust the steering wheel

any closer to you than is necessary

for proper steering operation and

comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates

with great force. If you are unrest-

rained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way,

you are at greater risk of injury or

death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from

the air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back

against the seatback and as far

away as practical from the steering

wheel. Always use the seat belts.

SPA2443

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever *

1down and adjust the

steering wheel forward or rearward to the

desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place.

Pull the lock lever *

2and adjust the steering

wheel up or down to the desired position.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel

in place.

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Black plate (160,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2444A

ELECTRIC OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or

down, forward or rearward to the desired

position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if so

equipped):

The automatic drive positioner system will make

the steering wheel move up automatically when

the driver’s door is opened with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver

get into and out of the seat more easily.

For more information, see “AUTOMATIC DRIVE

POSITIONER” later in this section.

SIC3451

SUN VISORS

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (161,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

CAUTION

.Do not store the main sun visor

before storing the extension sun

visor.

.Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor *

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing it to the side *

3. Draw out the extension sun visor *

3from

the main sun visor to block from further

glare.

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside

mirror to the desired position.

SPA2143

Manual anti-glare type

The night position *

1will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position *

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when ne-

cessary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Black plate (162,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2422A

Type A

SPA2450

Type B

Automatic anti-glare type

The inside mirror is designed so that it

automatically changes reflection according to

the intensity of the headlights of the following

vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when the ignition switch is pushed

to the ON position.

When the anti-glare system is turned on, the

indicator light *

Awill illuminate and excessive

glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind

you will be reduced.

Type A: Push the switch *

Bto make the

inside rearview mirror operate normally and the

indicator light will turn off. Push the switch

again to turn the system on.

Type B: Push the “*” switch *

Cto make the

inside rearview mirror operate normally. The

indicator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch

Dto turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the

sensors *

Eor apply glass cleaner on

them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensor, resulting in improper opera-

tion.

For the compass (if so equipped) operation, see

“COMPASS” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

For the HomeLink®Universal Transceiver opera-

tion, see “HomeLink®UNIVERSAL TRANSCEI-

VER” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (163,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2319

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located on

the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the switch right or left to select the right or

left side mirror *

1, then adjust using the control

switch *

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear

window defroster switch is operated.

SPA1829

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

Black plate (164,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SIC2064

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and pull up the cover.

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

.Entry/exit function

.Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

and steering column will automatically move

when the selector lever is in the P (Park)

position. This allows the driver to get into and

out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the

steering wheel will move up when the driver’s

door is opened with the ignition switch in the

LOCK position and the Intelligent Key not

inserted in the Intelligent Key port.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return

to the previous positions when the ignition

switch is pushed to the ACC position.

The driver’s seat will not return to the previous

positions if the seat or steering adjusting switch

is operated when the seat is at the exit position.

Cancel or activate entry/exit function

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The entry/exit function can be activated or

canceled by pressing and holding the SET

switch for more than 10 seconds.

The indicator lights on the memory switches (1

and 2) will blink once when the function is

canceled, and the indicator lights will blink twice

when the function is activated. Note that the

indicator lights may illuminate after 5 seconds

while holding the SET switch. This indicates

readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to a

stored memory position. Keep the SET switch

pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or

off the entry/exit function.

The entry/exit function can also be activated or

canceled if the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit” key

or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” key is turned

to ON or OFF in the “Comfort & Conv.” settings.

(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SET-

TINGS” in the “4. Monitor, heater, air condi-

tioner, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section.)

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the entry/exit function will not work

though this function was set on before. In such

a case, after connecting the battery or replacing

with a new fuse, open and close the driver’s

door more than two times after the ignition

switch is turned from the ON position to the

LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be

activated.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (165,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SPA2445

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering

column and outside mirrors can be stored in the

automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these

procedures to use the memory system.

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column and

outside mirrors to the desired positions by

manually operating each adjusting switch.

For additional information, see “SEATS” in

the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section and

“TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING” earlier in

this section and “OUTSIDE MIRRORS”

earlier in this section.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will stay on for approximately 5

seconds after pushing the switch.

If memory is stored in the same memory

switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking Intelligent Key to a stored mem-

ory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored

memory position with the following procedure.

1. Follow one of the steps for storing a memory

position.

.While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-

onds, push the button on the Intelligent

Key.

.Push the ignition switch to the OFF position,

and then push the SET switch. Push the

button while pushing the memory

button while the indicator light stays on for

approximately 5 seconds.

If the indicator light blinks, the Intelligent Key is

linked to that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position, and

then push the button on the Intelligent Key.

The driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside

mirrors will move to the memorized position.

Confirming memory storage

.Push the ignition switch to the ON position

and push the SET switch. If the main

memory has not been stored, the indicator

light will come on for approximately 0.5

second. When the memory has stored in

position, the indicator light will stay on for

approximately 5 seconds.

.If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In

this case, reset the desired position using

the previous procedure.

.If optional keys are added to your vehicle,

the memory storage procedure to switch 1

or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to

a stored memory position should be per-

formed again for each Intelligent Key. For

additional Intelligent Key information, see

“KEYS” earlier in this section.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Use one of the following methods to move

the driver’s seat, the outside mirrors and the

steering wheel.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

Black plate (166,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Push the ignition switch to the ON

position and push the memory switch

(1 or 2).

.Within 45 seconds of opening the

driver’s door, push the memory switch

(1 or 2).

The driver’s seat, steering column and

outside mirrors will move to the memorized

position with the indicator light flashing, and

then the light will stay on for approximately 5

seconds.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

.When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7

km/h) (entry/exit function).

.When the vehicle is driven (memory sto-

rage).

.When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat and steering column is turned on while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

.When the seat, steering column and outside

mirrors have already been moved to the

memorized position.

.When no position is stored in the memory

switch.

.When the engine is started while moving the

automatic drive positioner.

.When the selector lever is moved from the P

(Park) position to any other position. (How-

ever, it will not be canceled while the seat

and steering column are returning to the

previous positions (entry/exit function).)

.When the driver’s door remains open for

more than 45 seconds and the ignition

switch is not in the ON position.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Black plate (167,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

Black plate (13,1)

4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Safety note ....................................................... 4-2

Center multi-function control panel

(models with color display screen) ......................... 4-2

How to use multi-function controller ................... 4-4

How to use touch screen

(models with navigation system) ........................ 4-4

Start-up screen (models with navigation system) ... 4-6

Start menu (models with navigation system) ......... 4-6

How to select menus on the screen ................... 4-7

Vehicle information and settings............................. 4-8

How to use STATUS button.............................. 4-8

How to use brightness control and display ON/

OFF button................................................... 4-8

How to use INFO button.................................. 4-8

How to use SETTING button .......................... 4-12

Rearview monitor (if so equipped) ........................ 4-19

How to read the displayed lines....................... 4-20

How to park with predicted course lines............ 4-20

Difference between predicted and actual

distances ................................................... 4-22

How to adjust the screen............................... 4-24

Operating tips ............................................. 4-24

Ventilators ...................................................... 4-25

Heater and air conditioner .................................. 4-26

Automatic operation...................................... 4-28

Manual operation ......................................... 4-29

To turn the system ON/OFF ........................... 4-30

Operating tips ............................................. 4-30

In-cabin microfilter........................................ 4-30

Servicing air conditioner ................................ 4-30

Audio system .................................................. 4-31

Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-31

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer ..................................................... 4-39

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer ..................................................... 4-44

CompactFlash (CF) player operation

(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-49

iPod®player operation (if so equipped).............. 4-51

“MUSIC BOX” hard-disk drive

(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-52

CD/CF (CompactFlash) care and cleaning ......... 4-59

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio ........ 4-61

Antenna ..................................................... 4-62

NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System (MES)

(if so equipped) ............................................... 4-63

DVD player operation precautions .................... 4-63

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) system

components................................................ 4-64

Remote controller and headphones battery

replacement................................................ 4-68

Before operating the DVD entertainment

system....................................................... 4-68

Playing a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) ............... 4-69

Black plate (14,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Care and maintenance .................................. 4-73

Car phone or CB radio...................................... 4-74

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System with

navigation system............................................. 4-75

Regulatory information ................................... 4-76

Voice commands.......................................... 4-76

Control buttons ........................................... 4-77

Pairing procedure......................................... 4-77

Phonebook registration .................................. 4-78

Making a call............................................... 4-80

Receiving a call ........................................... 4-81

During a call ............................................... 4-81

Phone setting.............................................. 4-82

Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-84

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System without

navigation system (if so equipped) ....................... 4-85

Regulatory information ................................... 4-86

Initialization ................................................. 4-86

Operating tips ............................................. 4-86

Giving voice commands................................. 4-86

Control buttons ........................................... 4-88

Getting started ............................................ 4-88

Choosing a language .................................... 4-88

Pairing procedure......................................... 4-88

Making a call by entering a phone number ......... 4-89

Receiving a call ........................................... 4-89

List of voice commands ................................. 4-90

Call........................................................... 4-90

Phone book ................................................ 4-92

Memo pad.................................................. 4-94

Setup........................................................ 4-94

Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ....................... 4-96

Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-98

NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(models with navigation system) .......................... 4-99

NISSAN voice recognition standard mode.......... 4-99

Using the system ....................................... 4-102

NISSAN voice recognition alternate command

mode ...................................................... 4-109

Using the system ....................................... 4-115

Troubleshooting guide ................................. 4-121

Black plate (170,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

.Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in

accident, fire or electric shock.

.In case you notice any foreign

object in the system hardware, spill

liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell

coming from it, stop using the

system immediately and contact

your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-

ing such conditions may lead to

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

.Park the vehicle in a safe location

and apply the parking brake to view

the images on the front center dis-

play screen using devices connected

to the auxiliary input jacks.

Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

−48F(−208C) and above 1588F(708C)].

Operating this system under these condi-

tions may result in system malfunctions.

SAA1845

With navigation system

1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-8)

2, 6, 7, 8, 9.

For navigation system control buttons (Refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)

3. Multi-function controller (P.4-4)

4. “PHONE” Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem button (P.4-75)

5. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/

OFF button (P.4-8)

10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information button

(P.4-8)

11. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)

SAFETY NOTE

CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION

CONTROL PANEL (models with

color display screen)

4-2 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (171,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1846

Without navigation system

1. “INFO” vehicle information button (P.4-8)

2. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-8)

3. Multi-function controller (P.4-4)

4. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/

OFF button (P.4-8)

5. “SETTING” button (P.4-12)

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

SAA1847

With navigation system

SAA1848

Without navigation system

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

Black plate (172,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION

CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display using the main

directional buttons *

2(or additional directional

buttons *

6with navigation system) or center

dial *

3, and push the ENTER button *

1for

operation.

If you push the BACK button *

4before the

setup is completed, the setup will be canceled

and/or the display will return to the previous

screen. This button can also be used to delete

characters that have been input.

After the setup is completed, push the BACK

button *

4and return to the previous screen.

For the VOICE button *

5functions, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

(models with navigation system)

CAUTION

.The glass screen on the liquid

crystal display may break if it is hit

with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass breaks, do not touch the liquid

crystalline material, which contains

a small amount of mercury. In case

of contact with skin, wash immedi-

ately with soap and water.

.To clean the display, use a soft, dry

cloth. If additional cleaning is ne-

cessary, use a small amount of

neutral detergent with a soft cloth.

Never use a rough cloth, alcohol,

benzine, thinner or any kind of

solvent or paper towel with a che-

mical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

.Do not splash any liquid such as

water or car fragrance on the dis-

play. Contact with liquid will cause

the system to malfunction.

To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot

be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

SAA1542

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as those

for the multi-function controller are possible

using the touch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. When you select the

“Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area *

1on

the screen.

Touch the BACK *

2button to return the

previous screen.

4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (173,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1543

Adjusting the item:

Touch the + *

1or −*

2button to adjust the

settings.

Touch the UP *

3or DOWN *

4button to

move to the previous or next page.

SAA1617

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number *

There are some options available when inputting

characters.

.Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

.Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

.Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the question mark

(?).

.Space:

Inserts a space.

.Delete:

Deletes the last character that has been

input with one touch. Push and hold the

button to delete all of the characters.

.OK:

Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or

detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe

the screen.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Black plate (174,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1454

START-UP SCREEN (models with navi-

gation system)

When you push the ignition switch to the ACC

or ON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warn-

ing is displayed on the screen. When you read

and agree with the warning, push the ENTER

button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, you will

not be able to use the NAVI system.

To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA1860

START MENU (models with navigation

system)

The start menu can be displayed using the

ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted

controls.

1. While the map (if so equipped) or status

screen is displayed, push and hold the

ENTER switch until the “Menu Options”

screen appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item tilting the

ENTER switch up or down, and then push

the ENTER switch.

SAA1591

Available items

Destination/Route:

These items are for the navigation system. If your

vehicle is equipped with the navigation system,

see the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual for details.

Information:

Displays the information screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the INFO

button.

Settings:

Displays the settings screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the SET-

4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (175,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

TING button.

SAA1510

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the display

screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is

made or menu item is highlighted, different areas

onthescreenprovideyouwithimportant

information. See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen. (i.e. push SETTING button >

choose “Comfort & Conv.” menu item.)

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen. (i.e. Auto Interior Illumination,

etc.)

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the multi-function controller may

be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen

and select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selections

available for that screen (i.e. 1/9).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted. (i.e. Cabin lighting when unlock-

ing doors.)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Black plate (176,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, climate control

system, fuel consumption and navigation system

(if so equipped), push the STATUS button. The

following information will appear when the

STATUS button is pushed.

Audio ?Audio and Climate control system ?

Audio and fuel consumption ?Audio and

Navigation system (if so equipped) ?Audio

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-

TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

Push the “ OFF” button to switch the

display brightness to the daytime mode or the

nighttime mode, and to adjust the display

brightness using the multi-function controller

while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of

the screen.

The display brightness can also be adjusted

using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-

ness DOWN button (−).

Push and hold the “ OFF” button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the

button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle and navigation

(if so equipped) information for your conveni-

ence.

The information shown on the screen should be

a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.

See the following for details.

SAA1545

With navigation system

SAA1511

Without navigation system

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND

SETTINGS

4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (177,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.

The screens as illustrated will appear.

2. Choose an item using the multi-function

controller and push the ENTER button.

3. After viewing or adjusting the information on

the following screens, push the BACK

button to return to the INFORMATION

menu.

For the items “Traffic Info.”, “Where am I?”,

“GPS Satellite Info.” and “Navigation Version”,

refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual. SAA1546

SAA1547

Fuel Economy information

The distance to empty, average fuel economy

and current fuel economy (shown on the right

side bar) will be displayed for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use the

multi-function controller to highlight the “Reset”

key and push the ENTER button.

If the “View” key is highlighted with the multi-

function controller and the ENTER button is

pushed, the average fuel consumption history

will be displayed in graph form along with the

average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” later in this section.)

The fuel economy information may differ from the

information displayed on the dot matrix liquid

crystal display. This is due to the timing

difference in updating the information and does

not indicate a malfunction.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

Black plate (178,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1554

Maintenance information

To set the maintenance interval for Reminders 1

to 4, choose an item using the multi-function

controller and push the ENTER button.

You can also set to display a message to remind

you that the maintenance needs to be per-

formed.

The following example shows how to set

Reminder 1. Use the same steps to set the

other maintenance information.

SAA1555

1. Reset the driving distance to the new

maintenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance

schedule. To determine the recommended

maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

3. To display the reminder automatically when

the set trip distance is reached, highlight the

“Interval Reminder” key with the multi-

function controller and push the ENTER

button.

4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE

INFO., push the BACK button.

Maintenance information display cannot be

operated when the vehicle is moving. Stop the

vehicle in a safe place to see the information.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” later in this section.)

4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (179,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1611

The Reminder will be automatically displayed as

shown when both of the following conditions are

met:

.the vehicle is driven the set distance and the

ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK

position.

.the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or

ON position the next time you drive the

vehicle after the set value has been reached.

To return to the previous display after the

“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed,

push the BACK button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is dis-

played each time the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position until one of the following

conditions is met:

.“Reset Distance” is selected.

.“Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.

.the maintenance interval is set again.

SAA1592

Voice Recognition information (models

with navigation system)

When you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition

system for the first time or if you do not know

how to operate it, you can display the voice

command list or user guide for confirmation.

(See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYS-

TEM (models with navigation system)” later in

this section for the details.)

Command List:

Displays a list of voice commands that the

system can recognize.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Black plate (180,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

User Guide:

Displays a simplified operation manual of the

voice recognition system and how to use the

voice commands.

SAA1556

With navigation system

SAA1514

Without navigation system

HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appear when the

SETTING button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

To show the “Comfort & Conv.” item, push the

ignition switch to the ON position.

4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (181,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1557

Audio settings

The above display will appear when pushing the

SETTING button, selecting the “Audio” key

with the multi-function controller and pushing

the ENTER button.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:

To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound

balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Bal-

ance”or“Fade” key and adjust it with the

multi-function controller.

These items can also be adjusted by pushing

and turning the AUDIO knob.

Speed Sensitive Vol.:

Sound volume is increased according to the

vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from OFF

(0) to 5.

SAA1813

With navigation system

Display settings

The above display will appear when pushing the

SETTING button, selecting “Display” key with

the multi-function controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

Display:

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button

and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other

method is to push and hold the “ OFF”

button for more than 2 seconds.

When any mode button is pushed with the

screen off, the screen turns on for further

operation. The screen will turn off automatically

5 seconds after the operation is finished.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Black plate (182,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON

position, or push the “ OFF” button.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:

To adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen, select the “Brightness”or“Contrast”

key and push the ENTER button.

Then, you can adjust the brightness to “Darker”

or “Brighter”, and the contrast to “Lower” or

“Higher” using the multi-function controller.

For information on the “Background Color”

key, refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Navigation settings (models with navi-

gation system)

For the details of “Navigation” settings, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

SAA1814

Rear Display settings (if so equipped)

The above display will appear when pushing the

SETTING button, selecting the “Rear Display”

key with the multi-function controller and push-

ing the ENTER button.

Rear Display:

To open the rear display, push the ENTER

button. The rear display is flipped down auto-

matically. To close the rear display, push the

ENTER button and turn the “OK” indicator off.

The rear display will be closed automatically

when the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

The rear display can be also opened or closed

using the remote controller. (See “NISSAN

MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (MES)”

later in this section.)

4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (183,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1561

SAA1562

Volume and Beeps settings (models with

navigation system)

The Volume and Beeps settings display will

appear when pushing the SETTING button,

selecting the “Volume and Beeps” key with

the multi-function controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

Guidance Vol.:

To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or

softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust

it with the multi-function controller.

You can also adjust the guidance voice volume

by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice

guidance is being announced.

Guidance Voice:

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear

voice guidance in the navigation (if so equipped)

operation or in other operations.

Ringer Vol./Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:

For the details of these items, see “BLUE-

TOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this

section.

Button Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a

beep sound when you use a button.

SAA1612

Beeps settings (models without naviga-

tion system)

The Beeps settings display will appear when

pushing the SETTING button, selecting the

“Beeps” key with the multi-function controller

and pushing the ENTER button.

Button Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a

beep sound when you use a button.

Phone settings (if so equipped)

For the details of “Phone” settings, see “BLUE-

TOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM” later in this

section.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Black plate (184,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA2001

Clock settings

The Clock settings display will appear when

pushing the SETTING button, selecting the

“Clock” key with the multi-function controller

and pushing the ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is

always displayed in the upper right corner of the

screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly

because it is always adjusted by the GPS

system for models with navigation system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display or the

24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust (if so equipped):

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per

minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time

application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

.Pacific

.Mountain

.Central

.Eastern

.Atlantic

.Newfoundland

.Hawaii

.Alaska

Clock Adjust (if so equipped):

Adjust the hour and the minute by entering the

number.

4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (185,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1564

SAA1565

Comfort & Conv. settings

The Comfort & Conv. settings display will appear

when pushing the SETTING button, selecting

the “Comfort & Conv.” key with the multi-

function controller and pushing the ENTER

button. This key does not appear on the display

until the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position.

Auto Interior Illumination:

When this item is turned to ON, the interior

lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity (if so

equipped):

Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights

higher (right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay (if so equipped):

Choose the duration of the automatic headlight

off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and

180 second periods.

Selective Door Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s

door is unlocked first after the door unlock

operation. When the door handle request switch

on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is

pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding

door is unlocked first. All the doors can be

unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-

formed again within 60 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors

will be unlocked after the door unlock operation

is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, door lock/

unlock function by pushing the door handle

request switch will be activated.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so

equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, the steering

wheel moves upward for easy exit if the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s

door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and

pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,

the steering wheel moves to the previous

position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so

equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s seat

moves backward for easy exit if the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s

door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and

pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position,

the driver’s seat moves to the previous position.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Black plate (186,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Return All Settings to Default:

Select this item, push the ENTER button and

choose “YES” if you want to return all settings to

the default.

SAA1566

Others settings (models with navigation

system)

The Others settings display will appear when

pushing the SETTING button, selecting the

“Others” key with the multi-function controller

and pushing the ENTER button.

Voice Recognition:

For the details of this item, see “NISSAN VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with naviga-

tion system)” later in this section.

Language/Units:

.Select Language

Choose the “Select Language” key and

push the ENTER button. Select “English” or

“Franc¸ais” for your favorite display appear-

ance.

If you select the “Franc¸ais” key, the French

language will be displayed, so please use

the French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a

French Owner’s Manual, see “OWNER’S

MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER IN-

FORMATION” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section.

.Select Units

Choose the “Select Units” key and push

the ENTER button. Select “US” (Mile, 8F,

MPG) or “Metric” (km, 8C, L/100 km) for

your favorite display appearance.

4-18 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (187,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1092

Language/Units settings (models without

navigation system)

The Language/Units settings display will appear

when pushing the SETTING button, selecting

the “Language/Units”keywiththemulti-

function controller and pushing the ENTER

button.

Select Language:

Choose the “Select Language” key and push

the ENTER button. From the following display,

select “English”, “Franc¸ais” or “Espan

˜ol” for your

favorite display appearance.

Select Units:

Choose the “Select Units” key and push the

ENTER button. From the following display,

select “US” (Mile, 8F, MPG) or “Metric” (km,

8C, L/100 km) for your favorite display appear-

ance.

When the selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows

the view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in

detecting large stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect

small objects below the bumper and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

WARNING

.The rear view camera is a conve-

nience but it is not a substitute for

proper backing up. Always turn and

check that it is safe to do so before

backing up. Always back up slowly.

.Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual distance

because a wide-angle lens is used.

Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite than

when viewed in the rear view and

outside mirrors.

.Make sure that the lift gate is

securely closed when backing up.

.Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper cannot

be viewed on the RearView Monitor

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Black plate (188,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

because of its monitoring range

limitation.

.Do not put anything on the rear view

camera. The rear view camera is

installed above the license plate.

.When washing the vehicle with

high-pressure water, be sure not to

spray it around the camera. Other-

wise, water may enter the camera

unit causing water condensation on

the lens, a malfunction, fire or an

electric shock.

.Do not strike the camera. It is a

precision instrument. Otherwise, it

may malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric

shock.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.

SAA1896

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line *

Aare displayed on the

monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

.Red line *

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

.Yellow line *

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

.Green line *

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

.Green line *

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines *

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines *

Indicate the predicted course when backing up.

The predicted course lines will be displayed on

the monitor when the selector lever is in the R

(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is

turned. The predicted course lines will move

depending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the

steering wheel is in the neutral position.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

.Always turn and check that it is safe

to do so before backing up. Always

back up slowly.

.Use the displayed lines as a refer-

ence. The lines are highly affected

by the number of occupants, fuel

level, vehicle position, road condi-

tion and road grade.

.If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predicted course

line may be displayed incorrectly.

4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (189,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the

actual course line.

.If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed in-

correctly. If this occurs, please per-

form the following procedures:

— Turn the steering wheel from

lock to lock while the engine is

running.

— Drive the vehicle on a straight

road for more than 5 minutes.

.When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC

position, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

.The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right because the

rear view camera is not installed in

the rear center of the vehicle.

.The distance guide line and the

vehicle width line should be used

as a reference only when the vehicle

is on a level paved surface. The

distance viewed on the monitor is

for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

.When backing-up the vehicle up a

hill objects viewed in the monitor

are further than they appear. When

backing-up the vehicle down a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

closer than they appear. Use the

inside mirror or glance over your

shoulder to properly judge dis-

tances to other objects.

The vehicle width and predicted course

lines are wider than the actual width and

course.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen *

Awhen the selector lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Black plate (190,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines *

Benter the parking space *

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines *

Dparallel to the

parking space *

Cwhile referring to the

predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the selector lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor is for

reference only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

SAA1978

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to

the place *

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)

distance on the hill is the place *

B. Note that

4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (191,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor

further than it appears.

SAA1979

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown further than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to

the place *

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)

distance on the hill is the place *

B. Note that

any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor

closer than it appears.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

Black plate (192,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines *

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may

hit the object if it projects over the actual

backing up course.

SAA1980

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position *

Cis shown further than the

position *

Bin the display. However, the

position *

Cis actually at the same distance

as the position *

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position *

Aif

the object projects over the actual backing up

course.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

Monitor, push the SETTING button with the

RearView Monitor on, select the item key and

adjust the level using the multi-function con-

troller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,

Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure

the parking brake is firmly applied and the

engine is not running.

OPERATING TIPS

.When the selector lever is shifted to the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-

matically changes to the RearView Monitor

mode. However, the radio can be heard.

.It may take some time until the RearView

Monitor or the normal screen is displayed

after the selector lever has been shifted to R

from another position or to another position

from R. Objects may be distorted momenta-

rily until the RearView Monitor screen is

displayed completely.

.When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display

objects. This is not a malfunction.

4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (193,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

This is not a malfunction.

.Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

.The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

.The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from those of

the actual object.

.Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night. This is not a

malfunction.

.If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-

play objects. Clean the camera.

.Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discolora-

tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent

and then wipe with a dry cloth.

.Do not damage the camera as the monitor

screen may be adversely affected.

.Do not use wax on the camera window.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with mild detergent diluted with

water.

SAA1991

Center ventilators

SAA1990

Side ventilators

VENTILATORS

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Black plate (194,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1066

Rear (if so equipped)

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction

of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the vents are

closed.

: This symbol indicates that the vents are

open.

WARNING

.The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. On

hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the heater and air

conditioner system.

You can individually set the driver and front

passenger side temperature using each tem-

perature control button.

SAA1520

For the models with the color display screen,

push the “STATUS” button to display the heater

and air conditioner status screen. (See “HOW

TO USE STATUS BUTTON” earlier in this

section.)

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (195,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA2040

Type A

1. Temperature control button (driver side)

2. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON button

3. “ ” front defroster button

4. “ ” fan speed control dial/OFF button

5. “ ” intake air control button

6. “MODE” manual air flow control button

7. Temperature control button (passenger side)

8. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

9. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “REAR

WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-

TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.)

10. “ ” upper vent system button

11. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Black plate (196,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA2834

Type B

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON button/

Temperature control dial (driver side)

2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

3. “ ” intake air control button

4. “ ” fan speed control dial/ON/OFF button

5. “ ” upper vent system button

6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFF button/Temperature

control dial (passenger side)

7. “ ” front defroster button

8. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “REAR

WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROS-

TER SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.)

9. “MODE” manual air flow control button

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the inside

temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed

after the preferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator

on the button will illuminate and AUTO will

be displayed.)

2. Operate the driver side temperature control

buttons (type A) or dial (type B) to set the

desired temperature.

Adjust the temperature to about 758F

(248C) for normal operation.

.The temperature of the passenger com-

partment will be maintained automati-

cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed

will also be controlled automatically.

3. You can individually set driver and front

passenger side temperature using each

temperature control button (type A) or dial

(type B). When the “DUAL” button is pushed

or the passenger side temperature control

buttons (type A) or dial (type B) is/are

operated, the DUAL indicator will come on.

To turn off the passenger side temperature

control, push the “DUAL” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use this

mode.

1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator

will turn off.)

2. Operate the temperature control buttons

(type A) or dial (type B) to set the desired

temperature.

4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (197,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

.Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the

system may not work properly.

.Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. (The

indicator light on the button will come on.)

2. Operate the temperature control buttons

(type A) dial (type B) to set the desired

temperature.

.To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control

dial and set it to the maximum position.

.As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to

the auto mode.

.When the “ ” front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will automatically

be turned on at outside temperatures above

238F(−58C) to defog the windshield, and

the air recirculate mode will automatically be

turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging

performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the intake air control button “ ”to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The

indicator light “ ” will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting

mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation

Push the intake air control button “ ”to

change the air circulation from the intake air to

the outside air. The indicator light “ ” will turn

off.

Automatic air intake control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. To manually control

the intake air, push the intake air control button

“”. To return to the automatic control mode,

push the intake air control button “ ” for

about 2 seconds. The indicator lights will flash

twice, and then the intake air will be controlled

automatically.

Air flow control

Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control

button selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot out-

lets.

Upper vent system

When the “ ” upper vent button is pushed,

the air flow against the driver’s or passenger’s

upper body becomes gentle. The indicator light

on the button will come on.

In this mode, air from the center ventilators flows

both straight and upward in order to control the

cabin temperature without blowing air directly

on the occupants.

If you want strong air flow against your upper

body, push the “ ” button to turn the

indicator light off.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Black plate (198,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

TO TURN THE SYSTEM ON/OFF

Push the “OFF” or “ON·OFF” button when the

heater and air conditioner is off. The system will

turn on with the settings that were used

immediately before the system was turned off.

SAA1989

OPERATING TIPS

The sunload sensor *

Aon the instrument panel

helps maintain a constant temperature. Do not

put anything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,

defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in the NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow is

extremely decreased or when windows fog

up easily when operating heater or air

conditioning system.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind. This refrigerant will not

harm the earth’s ozone layer. However,

special charging equipment and lubricant are

required when servicing your NISSAN air con-

ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-

cants will cause severe damage to your air

conditioning system. (See “CAPACITIES AND

RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the

“9. Technical and consumer information” section

for air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations.)

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under

high pressure. To avoid personal injury,

any air conditioner service should be

done only by an experienced technician

with the proper equipment.

4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (199,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and push the “RADIO” button to turn

on the radio. If you listen to the radio with the

engine not running, the ignition switch should be

pushed to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the

vehicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception:

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other

vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that

can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

SAA0306

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to the

distance between the transmitter and receiver.

FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting

many of the same characteristics as light. For

example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Black plate (200,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the

treble setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other,

resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also

subject to interference as they travel from

transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):

When the satellite radio is first installed or the

battery has been replaced, the satellite radio

may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.

Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio

ON for satellite radio to receive all of the

necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®

satellite radio service subscription. Satellite

radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

.Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD changer/player.

.Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (201,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

changer.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

.The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

.The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

.Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

.Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

.CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints,

or that have pin holes may not work

properly.

.The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

—Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

—Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

—Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

.Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion.

—3.1 in (8 cm) discs

—CDs that are not round

—CDs with a paper label

—CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

.This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to

record or burn CDs.

.If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

—Confirm that the CD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

—Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperature

inside the player is too high. Remove

the CD by pushing the EJECT button,

and after a short time reinsert the CD.

The CD can be played when the tem-

perature of the player returns to nor-

mal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio

system (only MP3 or WMA CD).

CompactFlash (CF) player (if so

equipped)

.Do not force a CF card into the slot.

This could damage the CF card and/or

player.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the CF

card and dehumidify or ventilate the

player completely.

.The CF player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

.Do not expose a CF card to direct

sunlight.

.Confirm that a CF card is inserted

correctly.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Black plate (202,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

iPod®player (if so equipped)

.Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are

not displayed properly on the vehicle

center screen. We recommend using

English language characters with an

iPod®.

.Large video podcast files cause slow

responses in the iPod®. The vehicle

center display may momentarily black

out, but it will soon recover.

.If the iPod®automatically selects large

video podcast files while in the shuffle

mode, the vehicle center display may

momentarily black out, but it will soon

recover.

.Improperly plugging in the iPod®may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod®is connected properly.

.The iPod®nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast forward or rewind if it

is disconnected during a seek opera-

tion.

.An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using the iPod®nano (2nd Generation).

.Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on the iPod®.

.The iPod®nano (1st Generation) may

remain in fast forward or rewind mode

if it is connected during a seek opera-

tion. In this case, please manually reset

the iPod®.

.If you are using an iPod®(3rd Genera-

tion with Dock connector), do not use

very long names for the song title,

album name or artist name to avoid

the iPod®from resetting itself.

.Be careful not to do the following, or

the cable could be damaged and a loss

of function may occur.

—Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40

mm) radius minimum).

—Twist the cable excessively (more

than 180 degrees).

—Pull or drop the cable.

—Close the center console lid on the

cable or connectors.

—Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

—Spill liquids on the cable and con-

nectors.

.Do not connect the cable to the iPod®if

the cable and/or connectors are wet. It

may damage the iPod®.

.If the cable and connectors are ex-

posed to water, allow the cable and/or

connectors to dry completely before

connecting the cable to the iPod®(wait

24 hours for it to dry).

.If the connector is exposed to fluids

other than water, evaporative residue

may cause a short between the con-

nector pins. In this case, replace the

cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®

and a loss of function may occur.

.If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,

connectors cracked, contamination

such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the

connectors), do not use the cable and

contact a NISSAN dealer to replace the

cable with a new one.

.When not in use for extended periods

of time, store the cable in a clean, dust

free environment at room temperature

and without direct sun exposure.

.Do not use the cable for any other

purposes other than its intended use in

the vehicle.

.iPod®charging is only possible for

devices that support charging via a

FireWire®connection. Devices that can

4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (203,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

be charged by the iPod player include:

—iPod®Classic - 1st through 6th gen-

eration

—iPod®Mini - 1st and 2nd generation

—iPod®Nano - 1st through 3rd genera-

tion only

—iPod®Touch - first generation only

—iPhone®- first generation only

* The iPod®Classic and iPod®Touch may

not charge properly in some cases.

* 12V charging is not possible on the

iPhone 3G and later models.

* iPod®and FireWire®are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash (CF)

with MP3 or WMA

Explanation of terms:

.MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track from CD/CF can reduce the file

size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:

44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually

no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 com-

pression removes the redundant and irrele-

vant parts of a sound signal that the human

ear doesn’t hear.

.WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

.Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music files.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

.Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

.Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

.ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows®and Windows Media®are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries.

CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk

Corporation in the United States of America

and/or other countries.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Black plate (204,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1025

Playback order:

Music playback order of the CD/CF with MP3 or

WMA is as illustrated above.

.The folder names of folders not containing

MP3/WMA files are not shown in the

display.

.If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

.The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software, so

the files might not play in the desired order.

4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (205,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not

supported.

CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Without navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation With navigation system: 128 characters

Without navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM

Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Black plate (206,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.

Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before

using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data)

will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes

and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of

MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time before the music

starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required

before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,

might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song when playing. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is

prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in the desired order. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the

desired order.

4-38 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (207,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA2010

1. CD EJECT button

2. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

3. Radio station and CD selector buttons

4. CD LOAD button

5. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selector / AUDIO

control knob

6. AM·FM band select button

7. DISC button

8. AUX button

9. DISP (display) change/CLOCK button

10. Radio/CD SCAN (tuning) button

11. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button

12. REW (rewind) button for SEEK/TRACK

13. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK

14. AUX jack

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC

(CD) CHANGER

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this

section.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity reception system,

which employs two antennas printed on the rear

window. This system automatically switches to

the antenna which is receiving less interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF/VOLUME

control knob while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing

immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF/

VOLUME control knob turns the system off.

Turn the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob to

adjust the volume.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Black plate (208,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Adjusting sound quality:

Push the Audio control knob to change the

selecting mode as follows.

Bass ?Treble ?Fade ?Balance ?Beep

Rotate the Audio control knob to adjust Bass,

Treble, Fade and Balance to the desired level.

Fade adjusts the sound level between the front

and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the

sound between the right and left speakers.

To turn the beep sound off or on, rotate the

Audio control knob until the desired mode is

displayed. This turns on or off the beep sound

when audio buttons are pushed.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, push the Audio control knob

repeatedly until the radio or CD display re-

appears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will

automatically reappear after about 5 seconds.

CLOCK adjust:

Push the CLOCK adjust button for more than

1.5 seconds to turn on the CLOCK display.

See “CLOCK” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section for the detailed clock adjust-

ment operation.

AM-FM radio operation

radio (FM/AM) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station/channel played will also come

on when the ON·OFF/VOL control knob is

pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing when the radio

band select button is turned to ON, the audio

source will automatically be turned off and the

last radio station played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button or

to tune from low to high or high to low

frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting

station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the

button again during this 5 seconds period will

stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1to *

6Station memory operations:

Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM

band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can

be set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the radio band select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,

SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Select the desired station/channel and keep

pushing any of the desired station preset

4-40 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (209,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

buttons *

1to *

6until a beep sound is

heard. (The radio mutes when the select

button is pushed.)

4. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact Disc (CD) changer operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, push the LOAD button and insert the

compact disc into the slot with the label side

facing up. The compact disc will be guided

automatically into the slot and start playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc and the play time will appear on the

display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the com-

pact disc.

CD LOAD:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select

the loading position by pushing the CD insert

select button *

1to *

6, then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in

succession, push the LOAD button for more

than 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the

display.

PLAY:

When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will

start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and the

compact disc will start to play.

CD PLAY INFORMATION:

When the DISP button is pushed for less than

1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the

disc information display will change as follows:

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-

wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-

gram Search) FF, APS REW:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while the compact disc is being played, the

compact disc will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the

compact disc will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Black plate (210,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

the current track on the CD will be played.

CD PLAY selection:

To change to another CD already loaded into the

player, push the CD play select buttons *

1to

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while the

compact disc is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD select

button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5

seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for

more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it.

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the beginning of all the tracks of CDs will

be played for 10 seconds in sequence.

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the first program in all the CDs will be

played for 10 seconds.

Pushing the button again during this 10 second

period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within

10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

disc program.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a

portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or

laptop computers.

Push the AUX button to play a compatible

device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

4-42 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (211,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1850

1. CD EJECT button

2. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

3. Radio station and CD selector buttons

4. CD LOAD button (if so equipped)

5. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selector / AUDIO

control knob

6. Radio SCAN (tuning) button

7. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button

8. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for

SEEK/TRACK

9. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK

10. CompactFlash (CF) card slot (models with navi-

gation system)

No satellite radio reception is available unless

optional satellite receiver and antenna are

installed and an XM®satellite radio service

subscription is active.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Black plate (212,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1851

With navigation system

1. AM·FM band select button

2. SAT button

3. DISC·AUX button

SAA1852

Without navigation system

1. AM·FM band select button

2. DISC button

3. AUX/SAT band select button

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) CHANGER

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this

section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®

satellite radio service subscription. The satellite

radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing to the XM®satellite

radio. After receiving the activation signal, an

available channel list will be automatically

updated in the radio. For XM®, push the ignition

switch from LOCK to ACC to update the

channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity reception system,

which employs two antennas printed on the rear

window. This system automatically switches to

the antenna which is receiving less interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

4-44 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (213,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF/VOLUME

control knob while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD or AUX) which was playing

immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF/

VOLUME control knob turns the system off.

Turn the ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob to

adjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-

ance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push

the Audio control knob. When the display shows

the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,

Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control

knob to set the desired setting. For the other

setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect functions as

follows (if so equipped):

.Speed Sensitive Volume

For more details, see “VEHICLE INFORMATION

AND SETTINGS” earlier in this section.

Switching the display (for models with

navigation system):

Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch the

displays as follows:

CD ?CompactFlash* ?DVD* ?AUX ?

iPod®*?Music Box* ?CD

*: if so equipped

AM-FM-SAT radio operation

radio (FM/AM) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

or radio (SAT) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

(With navigation system)

SAT1 ?SAT2 ?SAT1

(Without navigation system)

AUX ?SAT1 ?SAT2 ?AUX

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station/channel played will also come

on when the ON·OFF/VOL control knob is

pushed to ON.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®

satellite radio service subscription. Satellite

radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and

Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the radio

band select button is turned to ON, the audio

source will automatically be turned off and the

last radio station played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

.For AM and FM radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob for manual

tuning.

.For XM satellite radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seek

channels from all of the categories when

any CAT is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY

(CAT):

.For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button

or to tune from low to high or high to

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Black plate (214,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

.For XM satellite radio

Push the SEEK·CAT or TRACK button

or to tune to the first channel of the

next or previous category.

During satellite radio reception, the following

notices will be displayed under certain condi-

tions.

.NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

.OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

.ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connection

error)

.LOADING (When the initial setting is

performed)

.UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-

scription is not active)

.INVALID CH (Invalid channel is received.)

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the

button again during this 5 seconds period will

stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1to *

6Station memory operations:

Twelve stations/channels can be set for the FM

band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and the SAT radio

(6 for SAT1, 6 for SAT2), and 6 stations can be

set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio band

select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,

SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Select the desired station/channel and keep

pushing any of the desired station preset

buttons *

1to *

6until a beep sound is

heard. (The radio mutes when the select

button is pushed.)

4. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Text:

When the “Text” key is selected with the multi-

function controller on the display and then the

ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio

is being played, the text information will be

displayed on the screen.

.CH Name

.Category

.Name

.Title

.Other

Compact Disc (CD) player/changer op-

eration

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, push the LOAD button (if so equipped)

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start

playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc and the play time will appear on the

display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

4-46 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (215,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the com-

pact disc.

CD LOAD (if so equipped):

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select

the loading position by pushing the CD insert

select button *

1to *

6, then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in

succession, push the LOAD button for more

than 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the

display.

or PLAY:

When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with

the system off and the compact disc loaded, the

system will turn on and the compact disc will

start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and the

compact disc will start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is

loaded and a medium is played using the

auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and

forth between CD and medium.

Text:

When the “Text” key is selected in the screen

using the multi-function controller and then the

ENTER button is pushed while the CD is being

played, the music information below will be

displayed on the screen.

CD:

.Disc title

.Track title

CD with MP3 or WMA:

.Folder title

.File title

.Song title

.Album title

.Artist

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-

wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-

gram Search) FF, APS REW:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while the compact disc is being played, the

compact disc will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the

compact disc will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the CD will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when a CD is being played.

CD PLAY selection (if so equipped):

To change to another CD already loaded into the

player, push the CD play select buttons *

1to

6or choose a disc displayed on the screen

using the multi-function controller.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while the

compact disc is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Black plate (216,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD select

button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5

seconds.

To eject all the discs (if so equipped), push the

EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it.

SAA1856

Auxiliary input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located on the rear

side of the center console. NTSC compatible

devices such as video games, camcorders and

portable video players can be connected to the

auxiliary jacks. Compatible audio devices, such

as some MP3 players, can also be connected to

the system through the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-

tion purposes.

.Yellow - video input

.White - left channel audio input

.Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the

power of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the

jacks, push the AUX button repeatedly until the

display switches to the AUX mode. The output

from the device will be played through the

monitor and audio system.

4-48 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (217,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1567

Display Mode:

The AUX settings display will appear when the

“Setting” key is selected using the multi-

function controller and pushing the ENTER

button.

Choose the display mode from the following:

.Normal

.Wide

.Cinema

SAA1862

COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYER OP-

ERATION (models with navigation sys-

tem)

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, remove the cover *

Aand insert a CF

card *

Binto the slot. Then, push the

button repeatedly to switch to the Compact-

Flash mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

CompactFlash card was playing, pushing the

ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the Com-

pactFlash card.

PLAY:

When the DISC button is pushed with the

system off and the CF card inserted, the system

will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a CF card

is inserted, push the DISC button repeatedly

until the center display changes to the Com-

pactFlash mode.

Text:

When the “Text” key is selected on the screen

using the multi-function controller and then the

ENTER button is pushed while the CF is being

played, the music information below will be

displayed on the screen.

.Folder title

.Song title

.Track title

.Album Title

.Artist

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Black plate (218,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-

wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-

gram Search) FF, APS REW:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while the CompactFlash card is being played,

the CompactFlash card will play while fast

forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the CompactFlash card will return to

the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the CompactFlash card

is being played, the next track or the beginning

of the current track on the CF will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when the CompactFlash card is

being played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the Compact-

Flash card, turn the MP3/WMA folder selector

or choose a folder displayed on the screen using

the multi-function controller.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while the

CompactFlash card is played, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CF EJECT:

When the knob next to the CF slot is pushed

with the CF card inserted, the CF card will be

ejected.

Messages:

The following messages will be displayed under

certain conditions.

.Reading Compact Flash (The system is

reading the CF card inserted in the slot.)

.No Compact Flash card (A CF card is not

inserted in the slot.)

.Compact Flash read error (The system

cannot read a CF card.)

.Unplayable file (The system cannot play a

music file.)

.No audio file (The CF card inserted in the

slot or its folder does not contain any music

files.)

SAA1853

Type A

SAA2011

Type B

4-50 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (219,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

iPod®PLAYER OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod®

Open the console lid and connect the cable *

as illustrated, and then connect the other end of

the cable to your iPod®*

2. Your vehicle is

equipped with the specialized cable for con-

necting the iPod®to your vehicle audio unit. The

battery of your iPod®is charged while it is

connected to the vehicle if the iPod®supports

charging via a FireWire®connection.

The display on the iPod®shows a NISSAN

screen when the connection is completed.

While connecting the iPod®to the vehicle, the

iPod®can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,

fully depress the center connector button to

unlatch the connector and pull the connector

straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the

cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side

connector buttons and pull the iPod®connector

straight out of the iPod®.

*iPod

®is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are available:

.Third generation iPod®(Firmware version

2.3 or later) (Audiobook and Podcast are not

available)

.Fourth generation iPod®(Firmware version

3.1.1 or later)

.Fifth generation iPod®(Firmware version

1.1.2 or later)

.5.5 generation iPod®(Firmware version

1.2.3 or later)

.iPod®mini (Firmware version 1.41 or later)

.iPod®photo (Firmware version 1.2.1 or later)

.iPod®nano (Firmware version 1.2 or later)

.The first generation iPod®classic (Firmware

version 1.0.3 or later)

The fourth generation iPod®nano, iPod®touch,

the second generation iPod classic and iPhone

3G may not work with the system in some

cases.

Make sure that your iPod®firmware is updated.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the DISC/AUX button

repeatedly to switch to the iPod®mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control

knob will start the iPod®.

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pushed with the

system off and the iPod®connected, the system

will turn on. If another audio source is playing

and the iPod®is connected, push the DISC

button repeatedly until the center display

changes to the iPod®mode.

Interface:

The interface for iPod®operation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®

interface. Use the multi-function controller and

the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod®

with your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the

menu list screen. For further information about

each item, see the iPod®Owner’s Manual.

.Playlists

.Artists

.Albums

.Songs

.Podcasts

.Genres

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Black plate (220,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Composers

.Audiobooks

The following touch-panel buttons shown on the

screen are also available:

.: returns to the previous screen.

.: plays/pauses the music selected.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind)/APS

(Automatic Program Search) FF, APS REW:

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is

playing, the iPod®will play while fast forwarding

or rewinding. When the button is released, the

iPod®will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is playing, the

next track or the beginning of the current track

on the iPod®will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when the iPod®is playing.

“MUSIC BOX” HARD-DISK DRIVE

(models with navigation system)

The “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system

can store songs from CDs being played. The

system has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage

capacity and can record up to 200 hours

(approximately 2,900 songs).

The following CDs can be recorded in the

“Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.

.CDs without MP3/WMA files

.Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid

CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs

.Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) spe-

cification in CD-Extras

.First session of multisession disc

Extreme temperature conditions [below

−48F(−208C) and above 1588F (708C)] could

affect the performance of the hard-disk.

NOTE:

If the hard-disk needs to be replaced due

to a malfunction, all stored music data will

be erased.

SAA1613

Recording CDs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For

the details of playing CDs, see “Compact

Disc (CD) player/changer operation” earlier

in this section.

2. Select the “REC” key using the NISSAN

controller and push the ENTER button.

NOTE:

.The system starts playing and record-

ing the 1st track on the CD when the

“REC” key is selected.

.Individual tracks from a CD cannot be

recorded to the “Music Box” hard-disk

drive.

4-52 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (221,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.The skip, fast forward and rewind

features are disabled while the CD is

recording.

.The recording process can be stopped

at any time. All tracks that were played

before the CD was stopped are stored.

.Individual tracks can be deleted from

the hard-disk drive after the CD is

recorded.

SAA1614

If the title information of the track being recorded

is stored either in the hard-disk drive or in the

CD, the title is automatically displayed on the

screen. For title acquisition from the hard-disk

drive, music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®.

To view the details of the track, select the Text

key by touching the screen or using the multi-

function controller. The track name and album

title are displayed on the screen.

If a track is not recorded successfully due to

skipping sounds, the mark is displayed

behind the track number.

The “Music Box” hard-disk drive cannot perform

recording under the following conditions.

.There is not enough space in the hard disk

.The number of albums reaches the maximum

of 500.

.The number of tracks reaches the maximum

of 3,000.

Automatic recording:

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned

to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.

(See “Music Box settings” later in this section.)

Stopping recording:

To stop the recording, select the STOP button

by touching the screen or using the multi-

function controller.

If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned

off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position, the recording also stops.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Black plate (222,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1615

Playing recorded songs

Select the “Music Box” hard-disk drive by using

one of the following methods.

.Push the source select switch repeatedly on

the steering wheel until the center display

changes to the “Music Box” mode. (See

“STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON-

TROLS FOR AUDIO” later in this section.)

.Push the DISC button repeatedly until the

center display changes to the “Music Box”

mode.

.Give voice commands. (See “NISSAN

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models

with navigation system)” later in this sec-

tion.)

Stopping playback:

The system stops playing when:

a. another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash or

AUX) is selected.

b. the audio system is turned off.

c. the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-

wind)/APS (Automatic Pro-

gram Search) FF, APS REW:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while a track is being played, the track will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the track will return to the

normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played,

the next track or the beginning of the current

track will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when a track is being played.

Play mode selection:

To change to another album or artist, turn the

MP3/WMA folder selector.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

4-54 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (223,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1684

There are some options available during play-

back. Select one of the following that are

displayed on the screen, if necessary.

Menu:

Refer to the following information for each item.

.Play by Artist

Plays songs by an artist whose music is

currently being played. The artists are sorted

in alphabetical order.

SAA1685

.Play by Album

Plays tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in alphabetical order.

.Play by Date

Plays tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in order of the date when they were

stored in the system.

.Play by Mood

Plays music from one of the following

moods: Relaxing Music, Lively Music, Slow

Music and Upbeat Music.

.Play by Category

Plays music from one of the following

categories: My Favorites, Hit Songs, Kids’

Songs and Rarely Played.

.Search Artists

Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.

Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks

by the artist and starts playing the first track.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Black plate (224,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1686

.Search Albums

Displays a list of albums in order of the date

when they were stored in the system.

Selecting an album displays all of the tracks

on the album and starts playing the first

track.

Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in

one of the following order: Rec. (Recorded)

Date, Name, Release Year, Artist.

.Search Song Details

Set the conditions and select the “Start

Song Search” key to search for a desired

song that is stored in the system. The

conditions are as follows:

Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)

Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s and ’10s

and After)

Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist, Group

and Duo)

Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip

Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk,

Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New

Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious,

World, Classical, Children’s and Other)

.Search Keywords

Input a search keyword using the keypad

displayed on the screen. (See “HOW TO

USE TOUCH SCREEN (models with navi-

gation system)” earlier in this section.)

.Edit Albums

Select a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,

Name, Released Year and Artist) and edit

the details using the keypad displayed on

the screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH

SCREEN (models with navigation system)”

earlier in this section.)

.Music Box System Info.

Displays the following information about the

“Music Box” hard-disk drive:

a. “Music Box” Used / Free Space (Informa-

tion about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track”

and “Remaining Time” is displayed.)

b. Mood Categories (Number of saved

tracks and their categories (Relaxing

Music, Lively Music, Slow Music, Upbeat

Music and Others) are displayed.)

c. Deleted Items (Information about the

deleted tracks is displayed.)

d. Search Missing Titles

If titles are not displayed for CDs that have

been recorded, titles can be acquired using

one of the following methods:

— Retrieve from HDD

Searches the title using the database in

the hard disk.

— Retrieve from CF

Searches the title from the information

acquired on the Internet. Visit

www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for de-

tails.

4-56 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (225,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

— Transfer Missing Titles to CF

Transfers the information of the album

recorded without titles to a Compact-

Flash card. Visit

www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for de-

tails.

e. “Music Box” Settings (See “Music Box

settings” later in this section.)

f. CDDB Version (the version of the built-in

Gracenote Database is displayed.)

SAA1688

Text:

Refer to the following information for each item.

.Set Mood

Set the mood category of the track to

“Relaxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow

Music” or “Upbeat Music”.

.Delete Track

Delete the track being played.

.Edit Info.

Edit the name of the track being played and

its artist using the keypad displayed on the

screen. (See “HOW TO USE TOUCH

SCREEN (models with navigation system)”

earlier in this section.)

The category of the track can also be set to

Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop, Club/

Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues, Country,

Metal, Easy Listening, New Age, Sound-

track, Gospel & Religious, World, Classical,

Children’s and Others.

.Remove Track

Reset the mood setting of a track.

Restoring deleted data

Deleted music data can be restored by perform-

ing the following.

1. Select the “Menu” key and then the “Music

Box System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and then

the “Album/Track” key.

3. Select the “Restore Album/Track” key to

restore the deleted music data.

You can also listen to the beginning of each

track that has been deleted by performing the

following.

1. Select the “Menu” key and then the “Music

Box System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Select the “Deleted Items” key and then

the “Play Sample” key.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Black plate (226,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1616

Music Box settings

To set the “Music Box” hard-disk drive to your

preferred settings, select the “Menu” key during

playback, “Music Box System Info.” key, and

“Music Box Settings” key with the multi-

function controller, and then push the ENTER

button.

Automatic Recording:

When this item is turned to ON, the “Music Box”

hard-disk drive automatically starts recording

when a CD is inserted.

Recording Quality:

Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132

kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

Title Text Priority:

Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc Data

Base) to acquire track information from the

Gracenote Database or set to CD TEXT to

acquire the information from CDs.

Delete ALL “Music Box” Data:

Delete all music data stored on the hard disk.

Gracenote

NOTE:

.The information contained in the

Gracenote Database is not fully guar-

anteed.

.The service of the Gracenote Database

on the Internet may be stopped without

prior notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-

TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote®MusicID®Terms of Use

This device contains software from Gracenote,

Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The

software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-

ware”) enables this application to do online disc

identification and obtain music-related informa-

tion, including name, artist, track, and title

information (“Gracenote Data”) from online

servers (“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote Data

only by means of the intended End-User

functions of this device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for

your own personal non-commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any Grace-

note Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT

TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,

THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACE-

NOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY

PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use

the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your license termi-

nates, you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all

rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and the Gracenote Servers, including all

ownership rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment to you

for any information that you provide. You agree

that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under

this Agreement against you directly in its own

name.

4-58 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (227,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric

identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID

service to count queries without knowing any-

thing about who you are. For more information,

see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy

Policy for the Gracenote MusicID Service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or warran-

ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy

of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete

data from the Gracenote Servers or to change

data categories for any cause that Gracenote

deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are

error-free or that functioning of Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers will be unin-

terrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide

you with new enhanced or additional data types

or categories that Gracenote may provide in the

future and is free to discontinue its online

services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTI-

CULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRIN-

GEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT

WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACE-

NOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE

SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE

BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST

PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more

information visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,

Inc., copyright *

C2000-2007 Gracenote.

Gracenote Software, copyright *

C2000-2007

Gracenote. This product and service may

practice one or more of the following U.S.

Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;

#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,

#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and

other patents issued or pending. Some services

supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.

for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and

CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.

The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the

“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks

of Gracenote.

SAA0451

CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE AND

CLEANING

.Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

.Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

.To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

Black plate (228,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

CF cards

.Never touch the terminal portion of the

CompactFlash cards. Do not bend the

cards.

.Always place the cards in the storage case

when they are not being used.

.Do not place heavy objects on the cards.

.Do not store the cards in highly humid

locations.

.Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.

.Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner’s

Manual for the details.

SAA1854

With navigation system

1. Source select switch

2. ENTER (models with navigation system) or tuning

(models without navigation system) switch

3. Volume control switch

4. BACK switch

SAA1855

Without navigation system

4-60 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (229,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON-

TROLS FOR AUDIO

ENTER (models with navigation system)

or tuning (models without navigation

system) switch

Push the switch upward or downward to select

a channel, track, CD or folder when they are

listed on the display.

Tune/Track:

RADIO

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next or previous preset channel

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Next or previous station

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the current

track

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Disc change (When only one disc is loaded,

the 1st track of the disc will be selected.)

CD/CF (if so equipped) with MP3/WMA

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the current

track

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Folder change (When the last folder on a

disc is playing, the next disc will be

selected.)

iPod®(if so equipped)

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Previous or next track (Start/Pause or Menu

can be selected when the ENTER button is

pushed.)

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Rewind or fast forward search

Music Box hard-disk drive audio system (if

so equipped)

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” shorter

Next track or the beginning of the current

track

.Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ” longer

Playlist change (When the last playlist is

playing, the next playlist will be selected.)

ENTER switch operation:

You can also use the ENTER switch to select the

items on the usual setting menu screen.

After selecting an MP3 folder using the up and

down switch, push the ENTER switch to

complete the selection.

While the display is in the NAVI, STATUS or

Audio setting screen, some audio functions can

also be controlled using the ENTER switch. The

function varies depending on if you push the

switch shorter (less than 1.5 seconds) or longer

(more than 1.5 seconds).

BACK switch

Push this switch to go back to the previous

screen or cancel the selection if it is not

completed.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

SOURCE select switch

Push the source select switch to change the

mode, Preset A, Preset B, Preset C, “iPod®” (if

so equipped), “Music Box” (if so equipped), CD,

and CompactFlash (if so equipped). If they are

not ready to function, those modes will be

skipped.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Black plate (230,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

.Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any

metal parts to it. This may cause

poor reception or noise.

.When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with

a dampened soft cloth.

SAA2102

Roof antenna (if so equipped)

Removing the antenna:

You can remove the antenna if necessary.

Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by

turning counterclockwise.

CAUTION

.To avoid damaging or deforming the

antenna,besuretoremovethe

antenna under the following condi-

tions.

— The vehicle enters an automatic

car wash.

— The vehicle enters a garage with

a low ceiling.

— The vehicle is covered with a car

cover.

.Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation. Otherwise,

the antenna rod may break during

vehicle operation.

4-62 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (231,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

This vehicle is equipped with the mobile

entertainment system, which enables you to

play a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the

images and sounds both in the front and rear

display screens.

WARNING

.The driver must not attempt to

operate or view the Mobile Enter-

tainment System (MES) while the

vehicle is in motion so that full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

.Do not attempt to modify the system

to display a movie on the front

screen while the vehicle is being

driven. Doing so may distract the

driver and may cause a collision and

serious personal injury or death.

CAUTION

.The glass screen on the liquid

crystal display may break if hit with

a hard or sharp object. If the glass

breaks, do not touch the liquid

crystalline material, which contains

a small amount of mercury. In case

of contact with skin, wash immedi-

ately with soap and water.

.Use a damp, soft cloth when clean-

ing the Mobile Entertainment Sys-

tem components. Do not use

solvents or cleaning solutions.

.Do not attempt to use the system in extreme

temperature conditions [below −48F

(−208C) or above 1588F (708C)].

.To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do

not operate the system more than 15

minutes without starting the engine.

Movies will not be shown on the front display

while the vehicle is in any drive position to

reduce driver distraction. Audio is available

when a movie is played. To view movies in the

front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,

move the selector lever to the P (Park) position

and apply the parking brake.

LHA0484

DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVD’s as they

may cause the DVD player to malfunction:

.3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

.DVD’s with a region code other than

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT

SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

Black plate (232,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

“1”. The region code *

Ais displayed in

a small symbol printed on the top of

the DVD *

.DVD’s that are not round

.DVD’s with a paper label

.DVD’s that are warped, scratched, or

have unequal edges

.Recordable digital video discs (DVD-R)

.Rewritable digital video discs (DVD-

RW)

SAA1863

DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD) SYS-

TEM COMPONENTS

DVD drive

The DVD drive is located inside of the center

console. Insert a DVD into the slot with the label

side facing the front of the vehicle. The DVD will

be guided automatically into the slot.

When ejecting the DVD, push the EJECT button

CAUTION

.Do not force a DVD into the slot.

This could cause damage the player.

.Do not use 8 cm (3.1 in) discs.

Displays

WARNING

Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake to view the

images on the front center display

screen using the DVD drive or other

devices connected to the auxiliary input

jacks (if so equipped).

CAUTION

.The glass screen on the liquid

crystal display may break if hit with

a hard or sharp object. If the glass

breaks, do not touch the liquid

crystalline material, which contains

a small amount of mercury. In case

of contact with skin, wash immedi-

ately with soap and water.

.Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning

4-64 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (233,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

the Mobile Entertainment System

components. Do not use solvents

or cleaning solutions.

.Be sure to stow the rear display

when it is not used.

SAA2002

Flip-down screen

Use the remote controller to operate the

motorized flip-down rear display screen.

1. Push the REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE

button on the remote controller to open or

close the display.

2. Adjust the display angle by pushing the

DISPLAY TILT button or .

The screen can also be opened using the multi-

function controller. See “Rear Display settings”

earlier in this section.

Do not block the range of the wireless remote

controller receiver and wireless headphones

transmitter *

CAUTION

Do not touch the display when it is

opening or closing.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

Black plate (234,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA0720

Headphones

Headphones are a wireless type and no cables

are necessary. You can use them in almost all

the ranges in the rear seat for listening to the

sound from DVD or AUX. (It is not possible to

use the headphones in the front seat.)

Power ON/OFF:

Push the POWER button to turn the head-

phones on or off.

SAA0721

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the

volume.

The headphones will automatically be turned off

in about 5 minutes if there is no sound during

that period. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, keep the power turned off when not

in use.

If the sound from the headphones is not clear it

may be because:

.of an infrared communication device or

cellular phone, turn down the headphone

volume or stop using the headphones, or

.the headphones maybe out of the range of

the transmitter installed in the rear flip-down

display screen. This is not a malfunction, or

.the sound may be interrupted temporarily

when there is an obstacle between the

headphones and the transmitter. Remove

the obstacle, such as opaque materials,

hands, hair, etc.

4-66 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (235,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1861

Remote controller

The remote controller has the following controls:

1. REAR DISPLAY OPEN/CLOSE button

2. DVD button

3. Joystick

4. AUX button

5. ENTER button

6. DISP button

7. VOLUME CONTROL button

(or )

8. Headphones button

9. TRACK/CHANNEL button

(or )

10. DISPLAY TILT button

(or )

11. BACK button

12. ASPECT button

13. SOUND button

14. Keypad

See “PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC

(DVD)” later in this section for the function of

each buttons.

SAA0978

Remote controller

SAA0723

Headphones

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

Black plate (236,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

REMOTE CONTROLLER AND HEAD-

PHONES BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones.

.Size AA (remote control)

.Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the +and 7ends on

the batteries match the markings in-

side the compartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, close the lid

securely.

.If you will not be using the remote

control for long periods of time,

remove the batteries.

.Replacement of the batteries is

needed when the remote control

only functions at extremely close

distances to the MES or not at all.

.Be careful not to touch the battery

terminal.

.An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always con-

firm local regulations for battery

disposal.

.When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the remote control

and headphones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. This device complies with

Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD EN-

TERTAINMENT SYSTEM

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-

ment system.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate

the DVD system or wear the head-

phones while the vehicle is in motion so

that full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

CAUTION

.Only operate the DVD while the

vehicle engine is running. Operating

the DVD for extended periods of

time with the engine OFF can dis-

charge the vehicle battery.

.Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled

liquids may cause the system to

malfunction.

.While playing VIDEO-CD media, this

DVD player does not guarantee

complete functionality of all VI-

DEO-CD formats.

.The technology protected by the U.S. patent

and other intellectual property rights owned

by Macrovision Corporation and other right

holders is adopted for this system.

.This copyright protected technology cannot

be used without a permit from Macrovision

Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,

4-68 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (237,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision

Corporation is not issued.

.Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

.Dolby digital is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

.Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

.DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” are

registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Parental level (parental control)

DVDs with the parental control setting can be

played with this system. Please use your own

judgement to set the parental control with the

system.

Disc selection

You can play the following disc formats with the

DVD drive:

.DVD-VIDEO

.VIDEO-CD

.CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CD

with MP3/WMA cannot be played.)

Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL” or “1

included” for your DVD entertainment system.

(The region code is displayed as a small symbol

printed on the top of the DVD.) This vehicle-

installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a

region code other than “1” or “ALL”.

Display settings

Front display:

To adjust the front display mode, press the

SETTING button while the DVD is being played,

select the “Others” key with the multi-function

controller, and then press the ENTER button.

To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,

color, contrast and black level select each key

using the multi-function controller and press the

ENTER button.

Then you can adjust each item using the multi-

function controller. After changes have been

made press the BACK button to save the

settings.

Rear display:

To adjust the rear display mode, push the “DISP”

(Display) button on the remote controller.

To adjust the display brightness, tint, color and

contrast, select each key using the joystick on

the remote controller and tilt the joystick to right

or left.

Push the BACK button to apply the settings and

return to the previous display.

SAA1829

PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC

(DVD)

DISC button

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the DVD

drive while watching the images.

Push the “DISC” button on the instrument panel

to turn the display to the DVD mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed

automatically.

The operation screen will be turned on when the

“DISC” button located on the instrument panel

is pushed while a DVD is being played, and it

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Black plate (238,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

will turn off automatically after a period of time.

To turn it on again, push the “DISC” button once

more.

DVD operation keys

To operate the DVD drive, select the preferred

key displayed on the operation screen using the

multi-function controller.

PAUSE:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER

button to pause the DVD. To resume playing the

DVD, use the “PLAY” key.

To pause the DVD, it is also possible to push the

“” button on the keypad of the remote

controller.

PLAY:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER

button to start playing the DVD, for example,

after pausing the DVD.

To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to

push the “ ” button on the keypad of the

remote controller.

STOP:

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER

button to stop playing the DVD.

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to

push the “ ” button on the keypad of the

remote controller.

SKIP (FORWARD):

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER

button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward.

The chapters will advance the number of times

the ENTER button is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible

to push the “ ” button on the keypad of the

remote controller.

SKIP (REWIND):

Select the “ ” key and push the ENTER

button to skip the chapter(s) of the disc back-

ward. The chapters will go back the number of

times the ENTER button is pushed.

To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also

possible to push the “ ” button on the

keypad of the remote controller.

SAA2003

Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-1

SAA1831

Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-2

4-70 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (239,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA2013

Setting (front) — DVD VIDEO-3

SAA2014

Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-1

SAA1194

Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-2

SAA1195

Setting (rear) — DVD VIDEO-3

DVD settings

Select the “Settings” key with the multi-

function controller and push the ENTER button

to adjust the following settings.

The items indicated with “*” can also be set from

the rear display. Push the “DVD” button on the

remote controller while a DVD is being played.

Select the preferred item using the joystick

“” on the remote controller and push the

ENTER “” button.

Menu* (DVD-VIDEO):

Some menus specific to each disc will be

shown. For details, see the instructions attached

to the disc.

Top Menu* (DVD-VIDEO):

Each title menu in the disc will be shown. For

details, see the instructions attached to the disc.

Audio* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD) / Subtitle*

(DVD-VIDEO):

Choose the preferred language using the multi-

function controller and push the ENTER button.

To turn off the subtitle, push and hold the

ENTER button until a beep sounds.

Display Mode* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):

Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or

“Cinema” mode using the multi-function con-

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Black plate (240,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

troller and push the ENTER button again.

Angle* (DVD-VIDEO):

If the DVD contains different angles (such as

moving images), the current image angle can be

switched to another one.

Select the “Angle” key and push the ENTER

button. When the “+” side or “−” side is

selected, the angle will change.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will

be shown on the bottom of the screen if the

scene can be seen from a different angle.

10 Key Search* (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,

CD-DA):

Select the “10 Key Search” key and push the

ENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Input the number you want to search for and

select the “OK” key with the multi-function

controller. Then push the ENTER button. The

specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be

played.

Title Search* (DVD-VIDEO):

The scene with the specified title will be

displayed the number of times the “+” side or

“−” side is selected.

Select No.* (VIDEO-CD):

Select the “Select No.” key and push the

ENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Input the number you wish to search for and

select the “OK” key with the multi-function

controller, and then push the ENTER button.

The specified scene will be played.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):

DVD menus are automatically configured and

the contents will be played directly when the

“Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some

discs may not be played directly even if this item

is turned on.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):

Select the “DVD Language” key and push the

ENTER button to open the number entry screen.

Input the number corresponding to the preferred

language and select the “OK” key with the multi-

function controller. Then push the ENTER

button. The DVD top menu language will be

changed to the one specified.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO):

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows you

to tune the dynamic range of the sound

recorded in the Dolby Digital format.

Remote controller operation

Use the remote controller to adjust the following

items.

Rear display open/close:

To open or close the flip-down rear display, push

the “ ” button on the remote controller.

Joystick:

Use the joystick “ ” to select the items

displayed on the rear screen.

ENTER button:

Push the ENTER “” button to make the

selected item complete on the rear screen.

BACK button:

Press to go back to the previous screen or

cancel the selection.

Display tilt:

Adjust the display angle by pushing the “DIS-

PLAY TILT” button or .

DVD mode:

To select the DVD mode, push the DVD button.

AUX mode:

To select the AUX (Auxiliary input jacks) mode,

push the AUX button.

4-72 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (241,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Volume:

To control the volume level, push the “VOL”

button or .

Display:

Press to adjust the rear display screen bright-

ness, tint, contrast, etc.

Aspect:

To change the display size, push the “ASPECT”

button. Each time the button is pushed, the

display size will change to “Cinema”, “Wide”,

“Full” or “Normal”.

Sound:

To change the language, push the “SOUND”

button. Each time the button is pushed, the

language will change to each language stored in

the DVD.

Headphones:

The DVD sound can be heard through the

headphones.

Push the “ ” button. Each time the button is

pushed the mode will switch to ON or OFF.

To control the volume of sound from the

headphones, use the VOLUME CONTROL

knob attached to the headphones.

Track/Channel:

Press to skip to the previous or next DVD scene

selection.

Keypad:

: PLAY/PAUSE button

: STOP button

: FORWARD button

: REWIND button

: FORWARD button for still images (for

DVD-AUDIO)

: REWIND button for still images (for DVD-

AUDIO)

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean

the surfaces of your Mobile Entertainment

System. (DVD player face, screen, remote

controller, etc.)

CAUTION

.Do not use any solvents or cleaning

solutions when cleaning the video

system.

.Do not use excessive force on the

monitor screen.

.Avoid touching or scratching the

monitor screen as it may become

dirty or damaged.

.Do not attempt to operate the

system in extreme temperature con-

ditions [below −48F(−208C) and

above 1588F (708C)].

.Do not attempt to operate the

system in extreme humidity condi-

tions (less than 10% or more than

75%).

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

Black plate (242,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA0451

How to handle the DVD

CAUTION

.Handle a DVD by its edges. Never

touch the surface of the disc.

.To clean a disc, wipe the surface

from the center to the outer edge

using a clean, soft cloth. Do not

wipe the disc using a circular mo-

tion.

.Do not use a conventional record

cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol

intended for industrial use.

.A new disc may be rough on its

inner and outer edges. Remove the

rough edges using the side of a pen

or pencil as illustrated.

.Never attempt to use a DVD that has

been cracked, deformed, or repaired

using adhesive. Doing so may cause

damage to the equipment.

.Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contam-

ination or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not

be read properly.

.Do not write, draw or attach anything on any

side of the DVD.

.Do not store the DVD in locations with direct

sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

.Always place discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

.Do not put on any sticker or write anything

on either surface of the DVD.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

cautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the electronic control modules

and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

.A cellular telephone should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use

of cellular telephones while driving.

.If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recom-

mended. Exercise extreme caution

at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

.If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-74 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (243,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

CAUTION

.Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

.Keep the antenna wire more than 8

in (20 cm) away from the electronic

control system harness. Do not

route the antenna wire next to any

harness.

.Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the man-

ufacturer.

.Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

.For details, consult a NISSAN deal-

er.

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

.If you find yourself unable to devote

full attention to vehicle operation

while talking on the phone, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a compatible Bluetooth®enabled cellular

phone, you can set up the wireless connection

between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module. With Bluetooth®wireless tech-

nology, you can make or receive a telephone call

with your cellular phone in your pocket.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-

vehicle phone module, no phone connecting

procedure is required anymore. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phonemodulewhentheignitionswitchis

pushed to the ON position with the registered

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-

ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone

number using your voice is possible. For more

details, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later

in this section; page 4-99.

Before using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

.Set up the wireless connection between a

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

.Some Bluetooth®enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list.

.You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

BLUETOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

Black plate (244,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, behind a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked in order not

to be dialed.

.When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

.Immediatelyaftertheignitionswitchis

pushed to the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth®wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual.

.If the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

.Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone pairing procedure

specific to your phone, battery charging,

cellular phone antenna, etc.

.The antenna display on the monitor will not

coincide with the antenna display of some

cellular phones.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as

well as to minimize its echoes.

.If reception between callers is unclear,

adjusting the incoming or outgoing call

volume may improve the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

— CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and

2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

— This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

BLUETOOTH®is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

For more details, see “NISSAN VOICE RE-

COGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation

4-76 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (245,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

system)” later in this section; page 4-99.

SAA1857

CONTROL BUTTONS

1) PHONE button

2) TALK/PHONE SEND button

SAA1895

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Push the PHONE button or the button,

and select the “Pair phone” key on the

display using the multi-function controller.

Then push the ENTER button.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

Black plate (246,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1572

2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the

name list of the phones, and push the

ENTER button.

SAA1925

3. When a PIN code appears on the screen,

operate the Bluetooth®cellular phone to

enter the PIN code.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone. See

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for the

details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for

instructions on pairing NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

When the pairing is completed, the screen

will return to the Bluetooth®setup display.

SAA1574

PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the

phonebook.

1. Push the SETTING button, and select the

“PHONE” key on the display using the multi-

function controller. Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and push the

ENTER button.

3. Select the “None (Add New)” key from the

name list of the phonebook, and push the

ENTER button.

4-78 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (247,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1575

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key, and

push the ENTER button in order to register

your cellular phone memory in the phone-

book.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send a

person’s name and phone number from the

memory of the cellular phone. The memory

sending procedure from the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone

manufacturer. See the cellular phone Own-

er’s Manual for more details.

SAA1576

6. After the memory is registered in the phone-

book, the system will ask if you want to add

a voicetag for it. If you want to add a

voicetag, select the “YES” key on the “Add a

voicetag?” screen. For example, if the

partner’s name is David, speak “David” after

a tone. The “David” voicetag is stored in the

phonebook. Voicetags allow easy dialing

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-

tem. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (models with navigation system)”

later in this section; page 4-99.)

7. When the phonebook registration is com-

pleted, the screen will return to the name list

of the phonebook.

.To confirm the stored voicetags, select

the “Voicetag Directory” key using the

multi-function controller, and push the

ENTER button.

.There are different methods to input a

phone number. Select one of the follow-

ing options instead of “Transfer via

Bluetooth” in step 4 above.

—Enter Data by Keypad

Input the name and phone number manually

using the keypad displayed on the screen.

(See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

(models with navigation system)” earlier in

this section.)

—Copy from Downloaded Phonebook

Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth®

cellular phone. The availability of this func-

tion depends on each cellular phone. The

copying procedure from the cellular phone

also varies according to each cellular phone.

See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for more

details.

—Copy from Outgoing Call Logs

Store the name and phone number from the

outgoing call list.

—Copy from Incoming Call Logs

Store the name and phone number from the

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

Black plate (248,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

incoming call list.

—Delete

Delete a contact that is registered in the

phonebook.

SAA1895

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedures below.

1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel or the button on the steering

wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on

the display.

2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the

“PHONE” menu, and push the ENTER

button.

3. Select the registered person’s name from

the list, and push the ENTER button. Dialing

will start and the screen will change to the

call-in-progress screen.

4. After the call is over, perform one of the

following to finish the call.

a. Select the “Hang up” key and push the

ENTER button.

b. Push the button on the steering

wheel.

c. Push the PHONE button on the instru-

ment panel.

There are different methods to make a call.

Select one of the following options instead of

“Call (Phonebook)” in step 2 above.

.Redial

Dial the previously dialed number again.

.Call (Call Logs)

Select the name or phone number from the

incoming or outgoing call logs.

.Call (Downloaded)

Select the name or phone number from the

downloaded call list.

.Dial (Keypad)

Input the phone number manually using the

keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models

with navigation system)” earlier in this

section.)

4-80 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (249,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1578

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will

change to the incoming call mode. To receive a

call, perform one of the following procedures

listed below.

a) Select the “Answer” key on the display and

push the ENTER button.

b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c) Push the button on the steering wheel.

There are some options available when receiving

a call. Select one of the following displayed on

the screen.

.Answer

Accept an incoming call to talk.

.On Hold

Put an incoming call on hold.

.Reject Call

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the

following procedures listed below.

a) Select the “Hang up” key on the display and

push the ENTER button.

b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c) Push the button on the steering wheel.

SAA1579

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the

screen if necessary.

.Hang up

Finish the call.

.Use Handset

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

.Mute

Mute your voice to the person.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

Black plate (250,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Keypad

Send a dial tone to the caller for using

network services such as voice mail.

.Cancel Mute

This will appear after “Mute” is selected.

Mute will be canceled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or

quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −)

on the steering wheel or turn the volume control

knob on the instrument panel while talking on

the phone. This adjustment is also available in

the SETTING mode. SAA1580

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, push the

SETTING button on the instrument panel and

select the “PHONE” key on the display, and then

push the ENTER button.

Phonebook

See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in

this section for adding, editing and deleting a

contact.

SAA1581

Downloaded Phonebook

Refer to the following information for each item.

.Download All

Download all of the contacts registered in

the Bluetooth®cellular phone. Availability of

this function depends on each cellular

phone. The memory downloading procedure

from the cellular phone also varies according

to each cellular phone. See cellular phone

Owner’s Manual for more details.

.Delete Downloaded Phonebook

Delete a downloaded phonebook.

4-82 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (251,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-

book

Delete an entry from the downloaded

phonebook.

Automatic Hold

If this item is turned on, an incoming call will be

placed on hold automatically after several rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone

If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is

different from the cellular phone’s will sound

when receiving a call.

Delete Call Logs

Delete all of the incoming or outgoing call logs

from the list.

Bluetooth Setup

See the following information for each item.

.Bluetooth

If this setting is turned off, the connection

between the cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module will be canceled.

.Bluetooth Info

Check information about the device name,

device PIN and connection status.

.Pair Phone

See “PAIRING PROCEDURE” later in this

section.

.Priority Change

Use this command to change the priority

level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone

will be connected to the system when more

than one paired Bluetooth®phone is in the

vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the

active phone and asks for a new priority level

(1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used

for another phone, the two phones will swap

priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C

to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

.Remove Paired Phone

Delete a registered cellular phone from the

paired list.

.Paired Phone List

Up to 5 registered cellular phones are

shown on the list. If you select a cellular

phone that is different from the one currently

being connected, the newly selected phone

will be connected to the system.

.Edit Phone Name

Rename the registered cellular phones using

the keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN (models

with navigation system)” earlier in this

section.)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Black plate (252,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command

correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in

this section; page 4-99.)

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to

use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the

wrong voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION” earlier in this

section.)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-84 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (253,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

.If you find yourself unable to devote

full attention to vehicle operation

while talking on the phone, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a compatible Bluetooth®enabled cellular

phone, you can set up the wireless connection

between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module. With Bluetooth®wireless tech-

nology, you can make or receive a telephone call

with your cellular phone in your pocket.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-

vehicle phone module, no phone connecting

procedure is required anymore. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phonemodulewhentheignitionswitchis

pushed to the ON position with the registered

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-

ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone

number using your voice is possible.

Before using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

.Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

.Some Bluetooth®enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list.

.You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, behind a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked in order not

to be dialed.

.When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

.Immediately after the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth®wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual.

.If the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

BLUETOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

Black plate (254,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone pairing procedure

specific to your phone, battery charging,

cellular phone antenna, etc.

.The antenna display on the monitor will not

coincide with the antenna display of some

cellular phones.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as

well as to minimize its echoes.

.If reception between callers is unclear,

adjusting the incoming or outgoing call

volume may improve the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

— CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and

2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

— This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

BLUETOOTH®is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

U.S.A.

INITIALIZATION

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-

lized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pushed before the initialization com-

pletes, the system will announce “Hands-free

phone system not ready” and will not react to

voice commands.

OPERATING TIPS

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-

ing:

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

.Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

.Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

.Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

Thecommandgivenispickedupbythe

microphone, and voice feedback is given when

the command is accepted.

.If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

4-86 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (255,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please try again.” Repeat the command in

a clear voice.

.If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” any time the system is waiting

for a response.

.You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the voice recognition

(VR) session. You can also push the

button on the steering wheel at any time.

Whenever the VR session is canceled, a

double beep is played to indicate you have

exited the system.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switches

(+ or −) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

NOTE:

The voice command “Help” is available at

any time. Please say “Help” to obtain the

information about how to use the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands.

Refer to the rules and examples below.

.Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

—“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

.Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

—NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred, and

—NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred.

.Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continuing

entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

—“six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

—“six two zero zero”

.You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at

anytime in any position of the phone number.

(Available only when using the “Call Inter-

national” command.)

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

—“One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

Black plate (256,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1858

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

TALK/PHONE SEND

Push the button to initiate a VR session

or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to skip

through system feedback and to enter

commands during a call. (See “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section

and “DURING A CALL” earlier in this section

for more information.)

PHONE END

Push the button to cancel a VR session

or end a call.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For

additional command options, see “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

CHOOSING A LANGUAGE

You can interact with the Bluetooth®Hands-Free

Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

See “HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON” earlier

in this section to change the language.

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Push the button on the steering wheel.

The system announces the available com-

mands.

2. Say: “Setup” *

A. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces the

next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” *

B. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces the

next set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone” *

C. The system ac-

knowledges the command and asks you to

initiate pairing from the phone handset *

When you are asked to enter a Pass Key for

pairing your Bluetooth®cellular phone,

operate it to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of the

number of phones paired.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone. See

the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for

details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on pairing NISSAN recommended

cellular phones.

5. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone *

If the name is too long or too short, the

4-88 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (257,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired and

the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level

F. The priority level determines which

phone is active when more than one paired

Bluetooth®phone is in the vehicle. Follow

the instructions provided by the system or

see “SETUP” later in this section for more

information on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to

select a custom ringtone *

G. Follow the

instructions provided by the system or see

“SETUP” later in this section for more

information on selecting ringtones.

MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING A

PHONE NUMBER

1. Push the button on steering wheel. A

tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” *

A. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

Say: “Call International” *

Bto dial more

than 10 digits using any special characters.

3. Say the number you wish to call, starting

with the area code in the single digit format

C. For better recognition results, it is

recommended to say the numbers in small

groups like, the 3-digits area code, the next

3 digits, then the last 4 digits. For example,

555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”

(1st group), “one two one” (2nd group) and

“three three five four” (3rd group). (See

“How to say numbers” earlier in this section

for more information.)

4. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and

announces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” *

D. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear the ringtone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ringtone, press the button on

the steering wheel to reject the call.

For additional command options, see “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

Black plate (258,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1926

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

When you push and release the button on

the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the

commands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands

currently available any time the system is waiting

for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing

it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time

while the system is waiting for a response. The

system will end the VR session. Whenever the

VR session is canceled, a double beep is played

to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime

the system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,

you can talk ahead by saying more than one

command at a time. For example, say, “Call five

five five one two one two” or “Memo pad

record.”

Also, when you get used to the system

responses, you can skip ahead to the tone by

pressing the button on the steering wheel.

However, if you press the button when the

system is waiting for a response from you it will

end the VR session.

SAA1927

CALL

<Name> (speak name)

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you

can dial a number associated with a name and

location.

See “PHONE BOOK” later in this section to

learn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phone book entry (voicetag) you wish to call.

The system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with

the name, the system asks you to choose the

location.

4-90 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (259,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Onceyouhaveconfirmedthenameand

location, the system begins the call.

<Number> (speak digits)

When prompted by the system, say the number

you wish to call. (See “How to say numbers”

earlier in this section and “MAKING A CALL BY

ENTERING A PHONE NUMBER” earlier in this

section for more details.)

“Redial”

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last number

dialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the VR session.

“Callback”

Use the Call Back command to dial the number

of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing. If a call

back number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to call back”

and ends the VR session.

International

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special

characters, please say “Call International”.

When the system acknowledges the command,

the system will prompt you to speak the number.

During a call

During a call there are several command options

available. Press the button on the steering

wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter

commands.

.“Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

.“Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session

and returns to the call.

.“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns

to the call.

.“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send

command to enter numbers during a call.

For example, if you were directed to dial an

extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command

and sends the tones associated with the

numbers. The system then ends the VR

session and returns to the call.

.“Transfer Call” — Use the Transfer Call

command to transfer the call from the

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System to

the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call

command again to return to a hands-free

call through the vehicle.

.“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

NOTE:

If the other party ends the call or the

cellular phone network connection is lost

while the Mute feature is on, the Mute

feature may need to be reset to “off.”

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

Black plate (260,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1928

PHONE BOOK

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each

phone paired with the system. Each name can

have up to 4 locations/phone numbers asso-

ciated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“New Entry”

Use the New Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name

you would like to give the new entry (voicetag).

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and you

confirm it is correct, the system asks for a

location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number

or to transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this

section for more information.)

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the

transfer from the phone handset. The new

contact phone number will be transferred from

the cellular phone via the Bluetooth®commu-

nication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts

you for the next command. When you have

finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number. The system then asks if you would like

to store another location for the same name. If

you do not wish to store another location, the

system ends the VR session.

“Edit”

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone

book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone

number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asks

you for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

4-92 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (261,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

The system will ask you to say a phone number

or to transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” (See “How to say numbers” earlier in this

section for more information.)

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the

transfer from the phone handset. The new

contact phone number will be transferred from

the cellular phone via the Bluetooth®commu-

nication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions

on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN

recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts

you for the next command. When you have

finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number, then announces that the entry has been

stored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete”

Use the Delete command to erase one entry

from the phone book, all entries from the phone

book, the current redial number or the current

call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book, say a

name or “All entries” when prompted by the

system.

The system acknowledges the command and

asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call back

number, say “redial number” or “call back

number” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists,

the system deletes them without asking for

confirmation.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying

to delete, the system says so and ends the VR

session.

“List Names”

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete the

system ends the VR session.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

Black plate (262,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1929

MEMO PAD

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice

memos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Play”

The system plays back all the memos in the

order of newest to oldest. The system ends the

VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, the system

announces “No messages to play.” The system

ends the VR session.

“Record”

The system announces “Recording” and a tone

sounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the or

button on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces

“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end

the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you

wish to record over the oldest memo.

“Delete”

The Delete command erases all memos. The

system asks you to confirm this action before

deleting all memos. SAA1930

SETUP

Use the Setup command to change options

associated with the Bluetooth®Hands-Free

Phone System.

“Pair Phone”

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to

the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System.

When you are asked to enter a PIN code for

pairing your Bluetooth®cellular phone, operate it

to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless of the

number of phones paired.

4-94 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (263,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a

sixth phone, the system announces that you

must first delete one phone or replace an

existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already been

paired to your vehicle’s system, the system

announces the name the phone is already using.

The pairing procedure will then be canceled.

When prompted by the system, choose from the

following commands:

.“New phone” — see “PAIRING PROCE-

DURE” earlier in this section.

.“Replace phone” — The system announces

the names of the phones already paired and

asks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone you

wish to replace, the paring procedure will

begin. (See “PAIRING PROCEDURE” ear-

lier in this section.)

.“List phone” — See the description below.

“List Phones”

Use the List Phone command to hear the names

of the phones currently paired. If no phones are

paired, the system announces, “No paired

phones to list.” The system then ends the VR

session.

“Select Phone”

Use the Select Phone command to select a

phone of lesser priority when two or more

phones paired with Bluetooth®Hands-Free

Phone System are in the vehicle at the same

time.

The system asks you to name the phone and

confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected

phone remains active until the ignition switch is

pushed to the LOCK position or you select a

new phone.

“Change Priority”

Use the Change Priority command to change

the priority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is

active when more than one paired Bluetooth®

phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the active

phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3,

4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used for

another phone, the two phones will swap priority

levels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C to

Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete Phone”

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phones

already paired with the system and their priority

level. The system then gives you the option to

delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to

the list again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all

phones, the system asks you to confirm this

action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associated

phone book for that phone will also be

deleted.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

Black plate (264,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

“Select Ring tone”

Use the Select Ring tone command to select the

tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call

is received.

The system announces the name of the active

phoneandasksyoutochoosefromthe

following commands:

.“Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone

and asks if you would like to select that tone.

If you say no, the system plays the next

ringtone available and continues to cycle

through the ringtones until you select one or

quit.

.“Silent” — The system asks you to confirm

your wish to disable the ringtone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of

dialect users to train the system to improve

recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of

commands, the users can create a voice model

of their own voice that is stored in the system.

The system is capable of storing a different

speaker adaptation model for memory A and

memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will use

memory A to store the model. If memory A is in

use and memory B is available, the system will

use memory B to store the model. If both of the

memory locations are in use, the system will ask

the user to select which memory location should

be overwritten.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine

running, the parking brake on, and the

transmission in the P (Park) position.

3. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/

SEND ( ) button for the hands-free

phone system to enter the speaker adapta-

tion mode”.

5. Press the button.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected

automatically. If both memory locations are

already in use, the system will prompt you to

overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-

vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, the press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.

Follow the instructions to register your

name.

11. The system will announce that speaker

adaptation has been completed and the

system is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

.The button is pressed for more than 5

seconds in SA mode.

.The vehicle is driven during SA mode.

.The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs you to

say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

.phone book new entry

.dial three oh four two nine

.delete call back number

.setup pair phone

.memo pad play

4-96 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (265,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.eight pause nine three two pause seven

.delete all entries

.call seven two four zero nine

.phone book delete entry

.memo pad record

.dial star two one seven oh

.Yes

.No

.select ringtone

.dial eight five six nine two

.Bluetooth on

.setup change priority

.call three one nine oh two

.nine seven pause pause three oh eight

.Cancel

.call back number

.call star two zero nine five

.delete phone

.dial eight three zero five one

.Home

.four three pause two nine pause zero

.delete redial number

.phone book list names

.call eight oh five four one

.Correction

.setup change ringtone

.dial seven four oh one eight

.setup main menu

.Delete

.dial nine seven two six six

.memo pad delete

.call seven six three oh one

.go back

.call five six two eight zero

.dial six six four three seven

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

Black plate (267,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free

operation of the systems equipped on this

vehicle in one of two modes, Standard Mode

or Alternate Command Mode.

In Standard Mode, commands that are available

are always shown on the display and announced

by the system. You can complete your desired

operation by simply following the prompts given

by the system. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOG-

NITION STANDARD MODE” later in this section

for details.) In this mode, hands-free operation of

Audio, Air Conditioner and Display is not

available through NISSAN Voice Recognition.

For advanced operation, you can use the

Alternate Command Mode that enables the

operation of the display, audio, and air condi-

tioner through NISSAN Voice Recognition. (See

“NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE

COMMAND MODE” later in this section for

details.) When this mode is active, an expanded

list of commands can be spoken after pushing

the TALK switch, and the voice command

menu prompts are turned off. Note that in this

mode the recognition success rate may be

affected as the number of available commands

and the ways of speaking each command are

increased.

For U.S. customers, the Standard Mode is

selected by default. For Canadian customers,

the Alternate Command Mode is the default

mode. To switch one mode to another, see each

mode description later in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate when

Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the

Speaker Adaptation Function available in that

mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that

Alternate Command Mode be turned off and

Standard Mode be used for the best recognition

performance.

For the voice commands for the navigation

system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s

Manual of your vehicle.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

STANDARD MODE

The following section is applicable when the

Standard Mode is activated. (This mode is

selected by default for U.S. customers.)

The Standard Mode enables you to complete

the desired operation by simply following the

prompts that appear on the display and also are

announced by the system. Hands-free operation

of Audio, Air Conditioner and Display systems is

not available in this mode.

SAA1566

Activating Standard Mode

When the Alternate Command Mode is active,

perform the following steps to switch to the

Standard Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display

and then push the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and

then push the ENTER button.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

Black plate (268,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1917

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”

key and push the ENTER button.

5. The indicator turns off and the Standard

Mode activates.

Displaying user guide

IfyouusetheNISSANVoiceRecognition

system for the first time or you do not know

how to operate it, you can display the User

Guide for confirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

accessing a simplified User Guide, which

contains basic instructions and tutorials for

several voice commands.

SAA2164

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using

the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER

button.

3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the

NISSAN controller and push the ENTER

button.

4. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-

troller and push the ENTER button.

You can skip steps 1 and 2 above if you say

“Help”.

Available items:

.Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

.Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice

command operation.

.Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for entering a destination by street

address.

.Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correct

command recognition by the system.

.Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available voice recognition

settings.

Note that the Command List feature is only

available when Alternate Command Mode is

active.

4-100 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (269,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1904

Getting Started

Before using the NISSAN Voice Recognition

system for the first time, you can confirm how to

use commands by viewing the Getting Started

section of the User Guide.

1. Highlight “Getting Started” and push the

ENTER button.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the

screen using the NISSAN controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system

If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or

“Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to

perform these operations using NISSAN Voice

Recognition.

SAA2165

Useful tips for correct operation

You can display useful speaking tips to help the

system recognize your voice commands cor-

rectly.

Highlight “Help on Speaking” and push the

ENTER button.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

Black plate (271,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1908

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, “Would you like

to access Phone, Navigation, Information or

Help?”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak a

command.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts

and speak after the tone sounds until your

desired operation is completed.

Operating tips:

.Say a command after the tone.

.Commands that are available are always

shown on the display and spoken through

voice menu prompts. Commands other than

those that are displayed are not accepted.

Please follow the prompts given by the

system.

.If the command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

.Push the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

.If you want to cancel the command, push

and hold the TALK switch. The

message, “Voice cancelled” will be an-

nounced.

.Push the TALK switch to pause the

operation. Push the TALK switch again

to restart the operation.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume control

buttons [+] or [−] on the steering switch or

use the audio system volume knob while the

system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers:

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice

commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero

zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)

Examples

.1-800-662-6200

— “One eight zero zero six six two six two

zero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers

You can improve the recognition of phone

numbers by saying the phone number in three

groups of numbers. For example, when you try to

call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first,

and the system will then ask you for the next

three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After

recognition, the system will then ask for the last

four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this

method of phone digit entry can improve

recognition performance.

When speaking a house number, speak the

number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is

included in the house number, it will not be

recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you

speak “oh” instead of “zero”. You can only say

“zero” for “0 (zero)”.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Black plate (274,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1909

4. Speak “Dial Number”.

SAA1910

5. Speak “8 0 0”.

SAA1911

6. The system announces, “Please say the next

three digits or dial, or say change number.”

7. Speak “6 6 2”.

4-106 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (275,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1912

8. The system announces, “Please say the last

four digits” or say change number.

9. Speak “6 2 0 0”.

SAA1913

10. The system announces, “Dial or Change

Number?”

11. Speak “Dial”.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662-6200.

Note:

.You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10

continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-

tinuous digits), if the area code is not

necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit group-

ing is recommended for improved recogni-

tion. (See “How to speak numbers” earlier in

this section.)

.You can only say a phone number using the

3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using

this command. Please use the “International

Call” command for all other formats.

.If you say “Change Number” during phone

number entry, the system will automatically

request that you repeat the number using

the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the

area code first and then follow the prompts.

.Do not add a “1” in front of the area code

when speaking phone numbers.

.If the system does not recognize your

command, please try repeating the com-

mand using a natural voice. Speaking too

slow or too loudly may further decrease

recognition performance.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

Black plate (276,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1859

Example 2 - Placing an international call to

the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:

1. Push the TALK switch located on the

steering wheel.

SAA1908

2. The system announces, “Would you like to

access Phone, Navigation, Information or

Help?”

3. Speak “Phone”.

SAA1909

4. Speak “International Call”.

4-108 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (277,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1914

5. Speak “01181111222333”.

SAA1915

6. Speak “Dial”.

7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222-

3333.

Note:

Any digit input format is available in the

International Number input process.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION AL-

TERNATE COMMAND MODE

The following section is applicable when Alter-

nate Command Mode is activated. (This mode is

selected by default for Canadian customers.)

The Alternate Command Mode enables the

operation of the display, audio, and air condi-

tioner through Voice Recognition. When this

mode is active, an expanded list of commands

can be spoken after pushing the TALK

switch, and the voice command menu prompts

are turned off.

Please note that in this mode the recognition

success rate may be affected as the number of

available commands and ways of speaking each

command are increased. To improve the recog-

nition success rate, try using the Speaker

Adaptation Function available in that mode.

(See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate

Command Mode)” later in this section.)

In the Alternate Command Mode, review the

expanded command list for this mode, as some

commands available in the Standard Mode are

replaced. Please see the examples on the

screen.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

Black plate (278,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1566

Activating Alternate Command Mode

When the Standard Mode is active, perform the

following steps to switch to the Alternate

Command Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key on the display

and then push the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and

then push the ENTER button.

SAA2168

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”

key and push the ENTER button.

5. The confirmation message is displayed on

the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate

the Alternate Command Mode.

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voice

commands for the first time or do not know the

appropriate voice command, perform the follow-

ing procedure for displaying the voice command

list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

SAA1545

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using

the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER

button.

3. Highlight the “Command List” key using the

NISSAN controller and push the ENTER

button.

You can skip steps 1 and 2 above if you say

“Help”.

4-110 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (280,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

List of help commands

Navigation Commands:

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Phone Commands:

COMMAND ACTION

Redial Redials the phone number last dialed.

Dial Number Dials the phone number given in the command.

Phonebook Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list.

Outgoing Calls Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

Incoming Calls Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Audio Commands:

.Music Box

COMMAND ACTION

Music Box Turns on the “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.

.Radio

COMMAND ACTION

Radio Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

4-112 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (281,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Satellite

COMMAND ACTION

Satellite Radio Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

.CD

COMMAND ACTION

CD Starts to play a CD.

.Audio

COMMAND ACTION

Audio OFF Turns the audio system off.

.iPod®

COMMAND ACTION

iPod®Turns the iPod®system on.

Vehicle Information Commands:

COMMAND ACTION

Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Fuel Economy Displays the Fuel Economy screen.

Maintenance Displays the Maintenance screen.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

Black plate (282,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Climate Commands:

COMMAND ACTION

Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.

Climate Control OFF Turns the climate control system off.

4-114 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (283,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

SAA1783

Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

accessing a simplified User Guide, which

contains basic instructions and tutorials for

several voice commands.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using

the NISSAN controller and push the ENTER

button.

3. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the

NISSAN controller and push the ENTER

button.

SAA2170

4. Highlight an item using the NISSAN con-

troller and push the ENTER button.

Available items:

.Getting Started

Describe the basics of how to operate the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

.Using the Address Book

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

.Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

.Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice

command operation.

.Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctly

speak commands in order for them to be

properly recognized by the system.

.Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available voice recognition

settings.

.Adapting the System to Your Voice.

Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-

lized, which takes a few seconds. When

completed, the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If the TALK switch is pushed

before the initialization completes the display will

show the message: “Phonetic data downloaded.

Please wait.” or a beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best performance from NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

Black plate (284,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

.When the air conditioner is in the AUTO

mode, the fan speed decreases automati-

cally for easy recognition.

.Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command.

.Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words. SAA1859

Giving voice command

1. Push and release the TALK switch

located on the steering wheel.

SAA1932

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, “Please say a

command”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak a

command.

Operating tips:

.Voice commands cannot be accepted when

the icon is .

.The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting

the ENTER switch on the steering wheel.

.If the command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Please say again”.

4-116 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (285,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

.Push the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

.If you want to cancel the command, push

and hold the TALK switch for 1 second.

The message “Voice canceled” will be

announced.

.Push the TALK switch again to pause

the operation. Push the TALK switch to

restart the operation.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume control

buttons (+ or −) on the steering wheel or

use the audio system volume knob while the

system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers:

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice

commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero

zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the follow-

ing examples:

.1-800-662-6200

— “Dial one eight zero zero six six two zero

zero.”

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone

dialing results, say phone numbers as single

digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousands”.

Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak

the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is

included in the house number, it will not be

recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you

speak “oh” instead of “zero”. You can only say

“zero” for “0 (Zero)”.

SAA1907

Speaker adaptation function (for Alter-

nate Command Mode)

The voice recognition system has a function to

learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition

performance. The system can memorize the

voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice:

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel, highlight the “Others” key on the

display and then push the ENTER button.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

Black plate (287,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

6. Select a voice command and then push the

ENTER button.

The voice recognition system starts.

SAA1921

7. The system requests that you repeat a

command after a tone.

8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak

the command that the system requested.

9. When the system has recognized the voice

command, the voice of the user is learned.

Push the switch or BACK button to return

to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command cor-

rectly, the voice command indicator on the

screen turns on.

SAA1922

Speaker Adaptation function settings:

Edit Name

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed

on the screen.

Store Result

When this item is turned to ON, the voice

recognition system can easily recognize the

user’s voice that it has learned.

Reset Result

Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-

tion system has learned.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

Black plate (288,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Continuous Learning

When this item is turned to ON, you can have

the system learn the voice commands in

succession, without selecting commands one

by one.

Minimize voice feedback (for Alternate

Command Mode)

To minimize the voice feedback from the system,

perform the following steps.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key using the

NISSAN controller and push the ENTER

button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key and

then push the ENTER button.

4. Highlight the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key

and push the ENTER button.

5. The item is turned to ON and the vocal

feedback is reduced if the voice recognition

system is activated.

4-120 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (290,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

MEMO

4-122 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Black plate (16,1)

5 Starting and driving

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 10/ 26

Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2

Three-way catalyst.......................................... 5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5

On-pavement and off-road driving precautions ...... 5-5

Off-road recovery........................................... 5-6

Rapid air pressure loss.................................... 5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...................... 5-7

Driving safety precautions ................................ 5-7

Push-button ignition switch .................................. 5-9

Intelligent Key system...................................... 5-9

Push-button ignition switch operation................ 5-10

Steering lock (if so equipped) ......................... 5-10

Push-button ignition switch positions ................ 5-11

Key port..................................................... 5-11

Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................... 5-12

Before starting the engine .................................. 5-12

Starting the engine ........................................... 5-13

Driving the vehicle ............................................ 5-13

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .......... 5-13

Parking brake .................................................. 5-17

Cruise control ................................................. 5-18

Precautions on cruise control .......................... 5-18

Cruise control operations ............................... 5-18

Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-20

Increasing fuel economy .................................... 5-20

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ................ 5-21

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch operations.... 5-21

AWD warning light ....................................... 5-22

Parking/parking on hills...................................... 5-24

Power steering ................................................ 5-25

Brake system .................................................. 5-25

Braking precautions ...................................... 5-25

Parking brake break-in................................... 5-25

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...................... 5-26

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-27

Cold weather driving......................................... 5-29

Freeing a frozen door lock.............................. 5-29

Anti-freeze.................................................. 5-29

Battery ...................................................... 5-29

Draining of coolant water ............................... 5-29

Tire equipment ............................................ 5-29

Special winter equipment ............................... 5-29

Driving on snow or ice .................................. 5-29

Engine block heater (if so equipped)................. 5-30

Black plate (292,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In

a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal

injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

.Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless car-

bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

dangerous. It can cause uncon-

sciousness or death.

.If you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, drive with

all windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

.Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

.Do not park the vehicle with the

engine running for any extended

length of time.

.Keep the lift gate closed while

driving, otherwise exhaust gases

could be drawn into the passenger

compartment. If you must drive with

the lift gate open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation to off

and the fan control to high to

circulate the air.

.If electrical wiring or other cable

connections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the lift gate or

the body, follow the manufacturer’s

recommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

.If a special body, camper or other

equipment is added for recreational

or other usage, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to prevent

carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle

appliances such as stoves, refrig-

erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-

erate carbon monoxide.)

.The exhaust system and body

should be inspected by a qualified

mechanic whenever:

— The vehicle is raised for service.

— You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

— You notice a change in the

sound of the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident invol-

ving damage to the exhaust

system, underbody, or rear of

the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Black plate (294,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

Additional information

.The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

.The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

.The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

.Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in

low ambient temperature, check the tire

pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-

ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the light still illuminates

while driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat. If you

have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. (See

“FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

.The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried

in snow.

.Do not place metalized film or any

5-4 Starting and driving

Black plate (295,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the

windows. This may cause poor re-

ception of the signals from the tire

pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. Some examples are:

.Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

.If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

.If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/

AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-

da.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-

OVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering

maneuvers, because these driving practices

could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or drugs

(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT

BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to do

so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than pas-

senger cars to make them capable of performing

in a variety of on-pavement and off-road

applications. This gives them a higher center of

gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of

higher ground clearance is a better view of the

road, allowing you to anticipate problems.

However, they are not designed for cornering

at the same speeds as conventional passenger

cars any more than low-slung sports cars are

designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road

conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or

abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover. Seat belts help

reduce the risk of injury in collisions and

rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or

improperly belted person is significantly more

Starting and driving 5-5

Black plate (297,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency service

to change the tire or see “CHANGING A

FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section of this Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-

stream reduces coordination, delays

reaction time and impairs judgement.

Driving after drinking alcohol increases

the likelihood of being involved in an

accident injuring yourself and others.

Additionally, if you are injured in an

accident, alcohol can increase the se-

verity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.

Although the local laws vary on what is

considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is

that alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by

alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep

water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly

designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional

off-road vehicle.

Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-

els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) models for rough road driving and

extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or

the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

.Drive carefully when off the road

and avoid dangerous areas. Every

person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should be seated with their

seat belt fastened. This will keep

you and your passengers in position

when driving over rough terrain.

.Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-road

vehicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

.Many hills are too steep for any

vehicle. If you drive up them, you

may stall. If you drive down them,

you may not be able to control your

speed. If you drive across them, you

may roll over.

.Do not shift ranges while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

.Stay alert when driving to the top of

a hill. At the top there could be a

drop-off or other hazard that could

cause an accident.

.If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill,

never attempt to turn around. Your

vehicle could tip or roll over. Always

back straight down in R (Reverse)

range. Never back down in N (Neu-

tral), using only the brake, as this

could cause loss of control.

.Heavy braking going down a hill

could cause your brakes to overheat

Starting and driving 5-7

Black plate (298,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

and fade, resulting in loss of control

and an accident. Apply brakes

lightly and use a low range to

control your speed.

.Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough

terrain. Properly secure all cargo

so it will not be thrown forward

and cause injury to you or your

passengers.

.To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacityoftheroofrack(ifso

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load. Secure heavy loads in the

cargo area as far forward and as

low as possible. Do not equip the

vehicle with tires larger than speci-

fied in this manual. This could cause

your vehicle to roll over.

.Do not grip the inside or spokes of

the steering wheel when driving off-

road. The steering wheel could

move suddenly and injure your

hands. Instead drive with your fin-

gers and thumbs on the outside of

the rim.

.Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

.Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may became hot.

.Lower your speed when encounter-

ing strong crosswinds. With a higher

center of gravity, your NISSAN is

more affected by strong side winds.

Slower speeds ensure better vehicle

control.

.Do not drive beyond the perfor-

mance capability of the tires, even

with AWD engaged.

.For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with

the engine running. Doing so may

result in drivetrain damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle da-

mage or personal injury.

.Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-

namometer (such as the dynam-

ometers used by some states for

emissions testing), or similar equip-

ment even if the other two wheels

are raised off the ground. Make sure

you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with

AWDbeforeitisplacedona

dynamometer. Using the wrong test

equipment may result in drivetrain

damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury. (AWD models)

.When a wheel is off the ground due

to an unlevel surface, do not spin

the wheel excessively.

.Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

.If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your vehicle has a higher

center of gravity than a conventional

passenger car. The vehicle is not

designed for cornering at the same

speeds as conventional passenger

cars. Failure to operate this vehicle

correctly could result in loss of

control and/or a rollover accident.

.Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

5-8 Starting and driving

Black plate (300,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

.The cargo area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Key may

function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, inside the glove box or

door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

SSD0910

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

OPERATION

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch

position will change as follows:

.Push center once to change to ACC.

.Push center two times to change to ON.

.Push center three times to change to OFF.

(No position illuminates.)

.Push center four times to return to ACC.

.Open or close any door to return to LOCK

during the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

turned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display

between the speedometer and tachometer. (See

“DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

STEERING LOCK (if so equipped)

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn

from the straight up position.

5-10 Starting and driving

Black plate (301,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

To lock the steering wheel, push the

ignition switch to the OFF position and

open any door. To unlock the steering

wheel, push the ignition switch. If the

steering lock release malfunction indicator

appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal

display, push the push-button ignition

switch again while lightly turning the

steering wheel right and left. (See “DOT

MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted

in the Intelligent Key port.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not

running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-

button ignition switch in ACC or ON

positions when the engine is not run-

ning for an extended period. This can

discharge the battery.

SSD0837

KEY PORT

Starting and driving 5-11

Black plate (304,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the selector lever to a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake

pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

.Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while shifting from P (Park)

or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D

(Drive) or L (Low) position. Always

depress the brake pedal until shift-

ing is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

.Cold engine idle speed is high, so

use caution when shifting into a

forward or reverse gear before the

engine has warmed up.

.Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-

verse) while vehicle is moving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

CAUTION

.When stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle

by depressing the accelerator pedal.

The foot brake should be used for

this purpose.

.Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

SSD0691

Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button *

Awhile depressing

the brake pedal.

: Push the button *

: Just move the selector lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal, push the selector lever button and move

the selector lever from the P (Park) position to

any of the desired shift positions.

5-14 Starting and driving

Black plate (305,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine

is not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in serious

personal injury or property damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position

only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the selector

lever button pushed in to move the selec-

tor lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Make sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal

must be depressed and the selector lever

button pushed in to move the selector

lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any

driving position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled

engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low):

Use this position for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes

and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not

use the L position in any other circumstances.

SSD0692

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the

selector lever in the D (Drive) position, the

indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates.

Use the overdrive off mode when you need

improved engine braking.

To turn off the overdrive off mode, push the O/D

OFF switch again. The indicator light will

turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when the

selector lever is shifted to any position other

than the D (Drive) position, the overdrive off

mode will be automatically turned off.

Starting and driving 5-15

Black plate (306,1)

Model "Z51-D" EDITED: 2009/ 8/ 3

Accelerator downshift

— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into a lower gear, depending

on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperature with heavy

loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine

power and, under some conditions, vehicle

speed will be decreased automatically to reduce

the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelerator

pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be

limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-

ning and subsequent hard braking, the

fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL

may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-

dicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section.) This will occur even

if all electrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, turn the ignition

switch to the OFF position and wait for 10

seconds. Then turn the ignition switch

back to the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating

condition. If it does not return to its normal

operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer

check the transmission and repair if ne-

cessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation

occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually

reduced. The reduced speed may be

lower than other traffic, which could

increase the chance of a collision. Be

especially careful when driving. If ne-

cessary, pull to the side of the road at a

safe place and allow the transmission

to return to normal operation, or have it

repaired if necessary.

SSD0693

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

selector lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal

depressed and the selector lever button pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform the following

procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover *

using a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock release *

Busing a

5-16 Starting and driving

Specyfikacje produktu

Marka:	Nissan
Kategoria:	Automatyczny
Model:	Murano (2010)

Potrzebujesz pomocy?

Jeśli potrzebujesz pomocy z Nissan Murano (2010), zadaj pytanie poniżej, a inni użytkownicy Ci odpowiedzą

Twoje imię*

Twój email*

Napisz tutaj swoje pytanie

Instrukcje Automatyczny Nissan

Nissan NV Passenger (2018) Instrukcja

15 Października 2024

Nissan Xterra (2015) Instrukcja

14 Października 2024

Nissan NV Passenger (2019) Instrukcja

14 Października 2024

Nissan Xterra (2006) Instrukcja

14 Października 2024

Nissan 370Z Coupe (2016) Instrukcja

13 Października 2024

Nissan NV1500 (2020) Instrukcja

13 Października 2024

Nissan Rogue Sport (2019) Instrukcja

8 Października 2024

Nissan Sentra (2005) Instrukcja

4 Października 2024

Nissan Leaf (2020) Instrukcja

3 Października 2024

Nissan Maxima (2002) Instrukcja

18 Września 2024

Instrukcje Automatyczny

Najnowsze instrukcje dla Automatyczny

Ford Focus Electric (2012) Instrukcja

3 Kwietnia 2025

Dodge Challenger SRT (2017) Instrukcja

2 Kwietnia 2025

Audi SQ5 (2024) Instrukcja

26 Marca 2025

Opel Rocks-e (2021) Instrukcja

13 Marca 2025

Aguilar DCB-4PJ Instrukcja

10 Marca 2025

Aguilar DCB-5J Instrukcja

10 Marca 2025

Aguilar DCB-4J Instrukcja

10 Marca 2025

Mercury Mountaineer (1998) Instrukcja

9 Marca 2025

Aguilar AG 4J-HC Instrukcja

9 Marca 2025

Aguilar AG 5J-HC Instrukcja

9 Marca 2025